JP6792593B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

Conventionally, there is a high possibility of a small hit, and a high rate of determining a variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the normal state as a variable display pattern of the second special symbol causes small hits to occur frequently in a short period of time. In a gaming machine that is in the KT state, which is an advantageous state for a player who is easy to play, during the period of the KT state, the game is played on the right route provided with the second start winning opening that satisfies the start condition of the second special symbol. There is a right-handed notification that prompts the player to shoot a ball, and counts and notifies (displays) the number of acquired balls acquired by the player during the period of the KT state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-30636

However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 does not have a general winning opening in which only prize balls are paid out by winning, but as described in paragraph 0036, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided in the game board. In the case, the number of balls acquired by winning in these general winning openings is also included in the number of balls acquired by the player during the period of the KT state, but for example, the route on the left side opposite to the right-handed notification. Also, if a general winning opening is provided, the number of winning balls by winning the general winning opening on the left side opposite to the right-handing notification during the KT state in which the right-handed notification is executed There is a problem that the player may be notified as a player and may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from giving a sense of discomfort.

(A) A gaming machine that has variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state.
A first general mouth, which is a general mouth to which a predetermined number of game media are given based on the entry of the game medium, and a second general mouth provided on a route different from the first general mouth.
In the advantageous state, a promotion effect for urging the game medium to be launched toward the path provided with the first general mouth and a specific notification effect for notifying that the game medium has entered can be executed. Control means and
With
The effect control means executes the specific notification effect when an approach occurs at the first general mouth in the advantageous state, but enters at the second general port when the advantageous state is reached. When the above-mentioned specific notification effect is not executed,
further,
A variable means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult.
A special state control means that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state including the change of the variable means to the first state.
A special state control means capable of controlling to a special state, which is more frequently controlled to the special state than a normal state,
A granting effect executing means capable of executing a granting effect when a game value is given based on the game medium entering the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state.
The variable means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable means cannot enter after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the percentage,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the game medium entering the predetermined area with the control of the special state, the giving effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.
In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) by performing variable display. The first general winning opening (first general winning opening 161), which is a general winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, five balls) of game media is given (paid out) based on the winning of the game medium (for example, a game ball). And the second general winning opening (the second general winning opening 162 and the third general winning opening 163) provided in a route different from the first general winning opening, and the first general winning opening in the advantageous state. A promotion effect (for example, an effect of displaying a right-handed instruction image on the effect display device 9) for encouraging the launch of the game medium toward the provided route (for example, a right-handed route) and the game medium won a prize. With an effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 200) that can execute a specific notification effect (for example, an effect of increasing the number of prize balls that increases the display of the number of prize balls or an effect of outputting a winning sound) to notify that. When a prize is generated at the first general winning opening in the advantageous state, the effect control means has the specific notification effect (when it is in the big hit game state or the small hit game state). 1 When a prize is generated at the general winning opening 161, an effect of increasing the number of winning balls or an effect of outputting a winning sound corresponding to the winning of the first general winning opening 161) is executed, but in the above-mentioned advantageous state. If a prize is generated at the second general winning opening, the specific notification effect is not executed (when the right-handed instruction image is displayed in an advantageous state, the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening is displayed. When a prize is generated at the mouth 163, the prize ball number increase effect is not executed by not executing the addition to the prize ball number counter, and the prize sound corresponding to the prize of the second general prize mouth 162 or the third general A variable winning means (for example, a portion that does not output a winning sound corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 163) and a second state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. The variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) are in a state different from the advantageous state, and are controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. A possible special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 for executing steps S90358 to S90360) and a special state (for example, a KT state) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state. 1st KT The state, the second KT state)) is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S902208A, S902221A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560), and the variable The winning means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, a nail as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball). It is realized by providing the group 55 and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds), and the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state. The first variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation) in which the variable display period is the first period, and the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect), and in the special state, after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern, the special The rate controlled by the state is lower than the rate controlled by the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern (for example, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is relatively long. 2 The rate determined for variation pattern # 28 is low (or not determined). (See FIG. 74).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the occurrence of a prize at the second general winning opening when the promotion effect is executed in an advantageous state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1, and the path provided with the first general winning opening (first general winning opening 161) is closer to the central position on the game board. It is a right-hand path on the right side, and the promotion effect is an effect of urging the game medium to be launched toward the right-side route (for example, an effect of displaying a right-handed instruction image on the effect display device 9). There is.
According to this feature, it is possible to encourage the game medium to be launched in the right path in an advantageous state.

The game machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the game machine according to the means 1 or the means 2, and includes a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game control means. Sends a winning command to the effect control means when the game medium wins the first general winning opening in the advantageous state, and the game medium is sent to the second general winning opening in the advantageous state. When a prize is won, the winning command is not transmitted to the effect control means (in the general winning opening winning notification process of the modified example shown in FIG. 59, when the first general winning opening 161 has a winning, the general winning is given regardless of the gaming state. When the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 is present when the mouth winning designation command is transmitted, but the general winning opening winning designation command is not transmitted), the effect control means The specific notification effect can be executed based on the reception of the winning command (in the modified example, the part that executes the effect of increasing the number of prize balls or outputting the winning sound in response to the reception of the general winning opening winning designation command). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the control load due to the transmission of unnecessary winning commands can be reduced.

The game machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3, and includes a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game. The game control means can control the advantageous state and the non-advantageous state (for example, low probability / non-KT state) that is not the advantageous state, and identifies that the game medium has won the first general winning opening. A possible winning command can be transmitted to the effect control means (for example, a portion for transmitting the first general winning opening winning designation command in step S402), and the effect control means has the winning command in the non-advantageous state. Is received, it is possible to execute a second promotion effect that prompts the game medium to be launched toward the route provided with the second general winning opening (for example, the process of step S813 in the launch instruction display process). Further, by executing the processes of steps S809 to S819, when a prize is generated in the first general winning opening 161 in the low probability / non-KT state, the effect of displaying the left-handed instruction image on the effect display device 9 is executed. Part) is characterized.
According to this feature, when it is controlled in a non-advantageous state, it is possible to execute a second promotion effect that encourages the game medium to be launched toward the path provided with the second general winning opening. , You can improve the game entertainment.

The game machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4, and includes a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game. The game control means includes an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) in which a special winning opening (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) can win a prize, and a non-advantageous state (for example, low probability / non-KT) that is not the advantageous state. The advantageous state start command (for example, the first big hit start designation command and the second big hit start designation command) that can be controlled by the state) and can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state An advantageous state end command (for example, a first jackpot end designation command or a second jackpot end designation command) that can be specified to end can be transmitted to the effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 200). The effect control means starts the specific notification effect in response to receiving the advantageous state start command, and ends the specific notification effect in response to receiving the advantageous state end command (for example,). , The display of the prize ball number display for performing the prize ball number increase effect in response to the reception of the first jackpot start designation command and the second jackpot start designation command is started in step S622b, and the first jackpot end designation command and the second jackpot end designation command and the second It is characterized in that the display of the prize ball number display is terminated (erased) in step S624b in response to the reception of the jackpot end designation command).
According to this feature, it is possible to control the execution of the specific notification effect in conjunction with the timing at which the advantageous state is controlled and the timing at which the advantageous state ends, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(A) A gaming machine that has variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state.
A first general mouth, which is a general mouth to which a predetermined number of game media are given based on the entry of the game medium, and a second general mouth provided on a route different from the first general mouth.
In the advantageous state, a promotion effect for urging the game medium to be launched toward the path provided with the first general mouth and a specific notification effect for notifying that the game medium has entered can be executed. Control means and
With
The effect control means executes the specific notification effect when an approach occurs at the first general mouth in the advantageous state, but enters at the second general port when the advantageous state is reached. When the above-mentioned specific notification effect is not executed,
further,
A variable means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult.
A special state control means that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state including the change of the variable means to the first state.
A special state control means capable of controlling to a special state, which is more frequently controlled to the special state than a normal state,
A granting effect executing means capable of executing a granting effect when a game value is given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area provided in the variable means in accordance with the control of the special state. ,
The variable means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable means cannot enter after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the percentage,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the game medium entering the predetermined area with the control of the special state, the giving effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.
In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) by performing variable display. The first general winning opening (first general winning opening 161), which is a general winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, five balls) of game media is given (paid out) based on the winning of the game medium (for example, a game ball). And the second general winning opening (the second general winning opening 162 and the third general winning opening 163) provided in a route different from the first general winning opening, and the first general winning opening in the advantageous state. A promotion effect (for example, an effect of displaying a right-handed instruction image on the effect display device 9) for encouraging the launch of the game medium toward the provided route (for example, a right-handed route) and the game medium won a prize. With an effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 200) that can execute a specific notification effect (for example, an effect of increasing the number of prize balls that increases the display of the number of prize balls or an effect of outputting a winning sound) to notify that. When a prize is generated at the first general winning opening in the advantageous state, the effect control means has the specific notification effect (when it is in the big hit game state or the small hit game state). 1 When a prize is generated at the general winning opening 161, an effect of increasing the number of winning balls or an effect of outputting a winning sound corresponding to the winning of the first general winning opening 161) is executed, but in the above-mentioned advantageous state. If a prize is generated at the second general winning opening, the specific notification effect is not executed (when the right-handed instruction image is displayed in an advantageous state, the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening is displayed. When a prize is generated at the mouth 163, the prize ball number increase effect is not executed by not executing the addition to the prize ball number counter, and the prize sound corresponding to the prize of the second general prize mouth 162 or the third general A variable winning means (for example, a portion that does not output a winning sound corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 163) and a second state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. The variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) are in a state different from the advantageous state, and are controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. A possible special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 for executing steps S90358 to S90360) and a special state (for example, a KT state) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state. 1st KT The state, the second KT state)) is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S902208A, S902221A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560), and the variable The winning means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, a nail as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball). It is realized by providing the group 55 and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds), and the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state. The first variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation) in which the variable display period is the first period, and the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect), and in the special state, after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern, the special The rate controlled by the state is lower than the rate controlled by the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern (for example, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is relatively long. 2 The rate determined for variation pattern # 28 is low (or not determined). (See FIG. 74).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the occurrence of a prize at the second general winning opening when the promotion effect is executed in an advantageous state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

The game machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6, and the game ball wins a prize in a predetermined opportunity (for example, a large winning opening or a special winning opening 24). A counting display executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200) that can update and display the counting display (for example, the prize ball number display) is provided, and the counting display executing means is after the update. According to the first pattern in which the period until displaying the counting result of is the first period, and the second pattern in which the period until displaying the updated counting result is a second period longer than the first period, the above The count display can be updated and displayed (for example, when the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second). When the prize ball number display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern, it is characterized in that the prize ball number is incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)).
According to this feature, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 8 to 12. Conventionally, the game medium is launched after being notified that the game machine is controlled to a special state (for example, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-5513. Even so, it is conceivable to configure the variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device) so as not to win a prize. However, when the variable display with a long variable display period is being executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation. Therefore, if such a configuration is simply combined, even if the variable display with a long variable display period is executed and then controlled to a special state, the variable winning means cannot win the game medium, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Far from being unable to do it, there is a risk that it will be less interesting. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest and enhancing a directing effect.

The game machine of the means 8 of the present invention is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) by performing variable display, and the first state in which the game medium can win and the game medium cannot win or The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) that can be changed to the difficult second state is different from the advantageous state, and the variable winning means changes to the first state. A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the above (for example, a part that executes steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) and a special state as compared with the normal state. Steps S902208A, S9022111A, S902212A, S902209B in the game control microcomputer 90560, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) which is frequently controlled. S902210B, S902213B, S902214B), and the variable winning means cannot win a game medium launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled to the special state. It is provided (for example, it is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). The variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation). It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period, and in the special state, The ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is lower than the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern ( For example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 8, and is a promotion notification (for example, right-handed) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium to a predetermined route when controlled in the special state. The promotion notification means (which is realized by displaying a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, or the like on the effect display device 909) capable of executing the notification) is provided. Even if the promotion notification can be executed in different modes depending on whether the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern and the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. When the variation display is executed by a good (for example, in the KT state, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28)), the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation). Compared to when the variable display is executed by patterns # 25 and # 27), the character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction are displayed by reducing or making them transparent, and are more positive. You may not urge him to hit right.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 8 to the means 9.
A storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, a hit ball supply plate 903 or a surplus ball tray 904) and a full tank notification means capable of executing a full tank notification indicating that the storage means is in a full tank state (for example, an effect). The display device 909 is provided with a character display of "full tank error" or an error sound), and the full tank notification means is controlled to the advantageous state and said. It may be possible to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different from that when the special state is controlled (for example, in the second KT state, a modest mode (for example, as compared with the jackpot gaming state). For example, the full tank notification may be executed by (for example, the character size of "full tank error" is small, the error volume is low, etc.), or in the big hit game state, when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, the tank is full. The notification may be executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification may be executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

The gaming machine of the means 11 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 8 to the means 10.
In the special state, when the next variable display after being controlled to the special state is executed and the special state is controlled again, the special effect (for example, continuous small hit effect) can be executed. Special effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S90933 and S90944 according to the process table selected in step S90928 in the effect control microcomputer 90200) may be provided.
According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 12 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 8 to the means 11.
A counting display executing means (for example, for effect control) capable of updating and displaying a counting display (for example, a winning ball number display) based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening or a special winning opening 9024). The part for executing step S90707 in the microcomputer 90200), the counting display executing means displays the first pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the first specific period, and the updated counting result. The count display can be updated and displayed by the second pattern, which is the second specific period in which the period until display is longer than the first specific period (for example, when the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is displayed 90300. When the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) and the number of prize balls display 90305 is displayed in the second KT pattern, the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) is displayed. ) To increase the number of prize balls by one).
According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the general prize opening prize notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the launch instruction display process. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous small hit effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the general winning mouth winning sound output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the continuous small hit production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where the game ball wins a prize in the 1st general prize opening provided in the right-handed path in the 5th round in a jackpot game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where the game ball wins a prize in the 1st general prize opening in the small hit game in the 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the left-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the general prize opening prize notification processing in the modification 1. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous small hit effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the relationship between the content of hold storage and the limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the continuous small hit production.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hit ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 3 and a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game ball can flow down is formed.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, a hit ball has won a prize in the second starting winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as the second variable display unit 9b), and a display area (hereinafter, the background symbol display unit) in which the player can easily visually recognize the displayed contents as compared with the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. 9c). It should be noted that the ease of visually recognizing the display contents means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display contents in the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol display unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol display unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol display unit 9c has two variable displays. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp. In addition, in this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and the effect identification information, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern), and the effect. Corresponds to the design.

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to be variable display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is 0 to 5 numbers and non-numeric characters and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, an indicator of another aspect may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages, is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the operating gate 17 is detected by the operating gate switch 17a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) in which the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14, which is the winning region, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 22 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used for a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided in the special winning opening 24. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, for example, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the first general winning opening More prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as 161 and the second general prize opening 162 and the third general prize opening 163. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the special winning opening 24 cannot pass (enter) the game ball to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, a first general winning opening 161 is provided on the lower right side of the special variable winning ball device 20, and a game ball that has won a prize in the first general winning opening 161 is provided in the first general winning opening 161. It is detected by the first general winning opening switch 16a, and a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection. Therefore, in the first general winning opening 161, only the game ball that is driven into the path on the right side of the center of the game board 6 and passes through the path on the right side can win a prize.

On the other hand, a second general winning opening 162 and a third general winning opening 163 are provided at the left side position and the diagonally lower left position of the first starting winning opening 13. The game ball that has won the second general winning opening 162 is detected by the second general winning opening switch 16b provided in the second general winning opening 162, and the game ball that has won the third general winning opening 163 is said to be. It is detected by the third general winning opening switch 16c provided in the third general winning opening 163, and a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls for each detection. In the second general winning opening 162 and the third general winning opening 163, a game ball is driven into the path to the left of the center of the game board 6 by an obstacle nail or the like formed on the game board 6, and the left side of the game ball is driven into the path. Only game balls that pass through the route can win a prize.

In addition, in the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163, only a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and even if a prize is won, a special symbol, a normal symbol, etc. It is a winning opening that does not execute the variable display of, and is a winning opening that can win a prize at a predetermined ratio based on the firing regardless of the game state, and these first general winning opening 161 and second general winning opening 162 and the third general winning opening 163 may be collectively referred to as a general winning opening.

Further, in the right-handed path (game area) in which the first general winning opening 161 is provided, a special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), A special variable winning ball device 22 (special winning opening 24) is provided, and the game medium flows down in a special gaming state which is one of a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a first KT state, and a second KT state. This is a possible area. On the other hand, the left-handed route (game area) provided with the second general winning opening 162 and the third general winning opening 163 is an area where the game medium can flow down in the non-special gaming state (low probability / non-KT state). Is. The "special state" in FIGS. 1 to 59 means a special gaming state, that is, any of a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a first KT state, and a second KT state.

Further, in the second start winning opening 14, a second starting opening switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special winning opening). Since the mouth 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches (so-called right-handed strike). Operation). Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays a “right-handed” message and an arrow indicating the right direction. Is displayed to notify that the right-handed operation period is in progress.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14). Changes to. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 9a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved memory displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c (total number) on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the second decorative symbol is started on the second variable display unit 9b. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved memories displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c (total number) on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or after a certain period of time has passed since the special variable winning ball device 20 was opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 6-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the small hit game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player, although the advantage is lower than that of the big hit game state (in this example, the number of balls that can be obtained is small). The game state does not transition to another game state before and after the game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , An odd number of 0-9) is higher than in the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state will be the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is made a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and then when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly completed when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state is shown, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, if the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the 1st KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned.

In addition, at the time of reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character). The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 that is long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodating hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in this state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 23, A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 23, and a downstream flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the ends of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 for guiding the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow paths portions bounces toward the glass door frame 2. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape that protrudes forward from the base plate portion 101 or protrudes rearward from the covering portion 117. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) on which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first general winning opening switch 16a, the second general winning opening switch 16b, the third general winning opening switch 16c, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch. An input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a to the game control computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 and the special variable. A solenoid 106 that opens and closes the winning ball device 22 and an output circuit 59 that drives the solenoid 206 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31 to control the game when the power is turned on. A system reset circuit for resetting the computer 560 (not shown) and an information output circuit that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer (Fig.). (Not shown) is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. Control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in the voice data ROM 704. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. The control related to the voice control and the lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command, and is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode that indicates.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped, such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 provides a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, and a ball payout device 97 provided in the game machine. In the process of controlling by itself, the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one lap (big hit judgment random number). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the generation counter and the like.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. The states are specified, and the states are determined (switch processing: step S21). In the switch process, when the detection signal of the gate switch 32a or the operation gate switch 17a is input, a process of transmitting a gate passage designation command to the effect control board 80 is also executed.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment) (2) Random 2: Type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit , 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type) (3) Random 5: determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the variation pattern) (4) Random 6: Determine whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determining the normal symbol hit) (5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1) (6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a general winning opening winning notification process (step S28a). In the general winning opening winning notification process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any of the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163 has won a prize, the first general winning opening switch 16a, Judgment is made based on the detection status of the 2nd general winning opening switch 16b and the 3rd general winning opening switch 16c, and if there is a prize in the 1st general winning opening 161 2 When there is a prize in the general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163, the process of transmitting the second general winning opening winning designation command is performed.

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 56 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, the CPU 56 issues a payout control command for specifying one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. Further, for example, when the CPU 56 inputs the detection signal from the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 25a, the CPU 56 outputs a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. To do.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 24 and is detected by the second count switch 25a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect described later are not immediately executed but are executed later. However, regarding the payout of prize balls, in the prize ball processing in step S30, when the detection signal from the second count switch 25a is input, the payout control for immediately designating the number of prize balls is 15. A command is output, the ball payout device 97 is driven by the payout control microcomputer, and 15 prize balls are immediately paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 uses the CPU 56. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value shown in the right column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10A is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S162B) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, resulting in a small hit. As described above, in the KT state, since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the big hit game state.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 10 (A). If any of the jackpot judgment values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for determining the big hit matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10 (B), it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 10B indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 8b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 10B is performed, and the lottery process is performed to be about 1/4. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a 20% probability, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state shifts to the second KT state. See steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not in the second KT state even if it becomes "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probability change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probability change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2215B and S2010-S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Twenty-eight types of # 01 to # 28 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 28) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12B The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain prize ball can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced. By making it, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize ball is targeted by a small hit even in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special prize opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13D, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. To. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 11 Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 13E, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation is applied. May be decided. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. In this embodiment, it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are misses or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 or the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In this case, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 9, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". The second variation pattern # 12 and the second variation pattern # 13 with the end display are determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at least a plurality of small hits can be generated is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the short shortening fluctuation. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 19 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is included. 18 may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 20 to # 24 is applied. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the range after the second fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. May be determined as the second fluctuation pattern # 20 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. Further, even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 24 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), even when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, the second fluctuation pattern # 21 and the second fluctuation pattern including the battle effect are included. # 23 may be determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 28.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation of the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed, may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, a second fluctuation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues is included. It may be decided to be # 26. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 28 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the variation pattern of the shortened variation of the second variation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it differs depending on the number of reserved storages. It may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation by the ratio. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be determined at a higher rate as the number of reserved memories increases, so that the reserved memories are digested earlier and the operating rate may be increased.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed even shorter in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in the low probability state and execute a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined to be, the normal symbol display 10 is used to derive and display the symbol, and if it is determined to be out of order, the normal symbol display 10 is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined to be, the normal symbol display 10 is used to derive and display the symbol, and if it is determined to be out of order, the normal symbol display 10 is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. For example, in this embodiment, the winning frequency of the game balls is low as compared with the case where a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round in the big hit game state, but during one small hit game in the second KT state. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the game balls to the large winning opening or the special winning opening 24 with respect to the number of game balls fired in the game area 7.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) Determines whether or not to hit the normal map. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 15 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 15 in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 15 (1). A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when the left-handed notification is given after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result specification command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol and the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) that specifies that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (first general winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the first general winning opening 161 has been won. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (second general winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the second general winning opening 162 has been won. The command E102 (H) is an effect control command (third general winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the third general winning opening 163 has been won.

In the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 200 specifies which of the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163 has occurred, and different winning sounds. The first general winning opening winning designation command, the second general winning opening winning designation command, and the second general winning opening winning designation command corresponding to each of the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163, so that 3 The form in which the general winning opening prize designation command is provided is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second general winning opening is not provided with the third general winning opening winning designation command. When the 162 or the 3rd general winning opening 163 is won, the number of commands is reduced by transmitting the 2nd general winning opening winning designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 200 uses the 2nd general winning opening 162 and the 3rd general. It is not possible to specify which of the winning openings 163 is the winning, but it is the winning of the first general winning opening 161 corresponding to the right route, or the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening corresponding to the left route. It may be possible to identify whether the prize is a prize in 163.

The command E300 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 or the operating gate 17. It should be noted that the gate 32 and the operation gate 17 are provided with individual effect control commands so that the effect control microcomputer 200 can specify whether the game ball has passed through the gate 32 or the operation gate 17. May be good.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the voice output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 provided on the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 (step S311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process (step S36) based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S22, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, it means that the first special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S50A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished (step S51A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the transmission of the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53A), the value of the first hold storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first hold storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send a background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S63A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S63A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S63A, steps S64A to S161A A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S66A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is determined.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is used is determined (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and changes. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the process of step S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. It is stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 27, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, It is configured to store a new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011) to see if it becomes "0". (Step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state ( Step S2013) and step S2014. As a result, when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state).

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 (step S321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is set to be off (including the case where it is forced to be off)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the second large winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second big winning opening opening processing (step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, the control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350, it means that the second special symbol display 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S50B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished (step S51B). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S63B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processing after step S64B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S63B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S63B, steps S64B to S161B A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot (step S160B), the jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the step Move to S68B.

If the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the small hit determination module (step S162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (which may be a small hit determination random number) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S163B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is determined.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the type determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. Controls transmission.

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S354), substantially the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S304) shown in FIG. 24 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 24, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is generally explained. However, in the second special symbol stop processing, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step S358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S2208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the transition to the second KT state is made only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets "100" in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a general winning opening winning notification process (step S28a) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the general winning opening winning notification process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first general winning opening switch 16a is turned on, that is, the first general winning opening in which only a game ball passing through a right-handed path can win a prize. It is determined whether or not there is a prize in 161 (step S401). When the first general winning opening switch 16a is on, the first general winning opening winning designation command is transmitted (step S402), and the effect control microcomputer 200 is directed to the first general winning opening 161. Notify that there was a prize.

On the other hand, if there is no prize in the first general prize opening 161, whether or not the second general prize opening switch 16b is turned on, that is, only the game ball passing through the left-handed route can win the prize. It is determined whether or not the second general winning opening 162 has won a prize (step S403). When the second general winning opening switch 16b is on, the second general winning opening winning designation command is transmitted (step S404), and the effect control microcomputer 200 is directed to the second general winning opening 162. Notify that there was a prize.

If the second general winning opening 162 is not won, only the game ball passing through the left-handed route can be won, whether or not the third general winning opening switch 16c is turned on. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the third general winning opening 163 (step S405). When the third general winning opening switch 16c is on, the third general winning opening winning designation command is transmitted (step S406), and the effect control microcomputer 200 is directed to the third general winning opening 163. Notify that there was a prize.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. In addition, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, the general winning opening winning sound output process for notifying that the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163 have been won is executed (step S707). In addition, a prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed (step S708). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S709). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S710). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

32 to 34 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags. After setting these fanfare flags, the effect control CPU 201 further sets a hit flag so that it can be identified during the big hit game or the small hit game (step S622a), and displays the background symbol. In part 9c, the number of prize balls is displayed (step S622b).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624 is also referred to as an ending flag. After setting these ending flags, the effect control CPU 201 further clears the hitting flag (step S624a) and ends (erases the display) the prize ball number display displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c. (Step S624b).

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626). After setting these small hit start designation command reception flags, the effect control CPU 201 further sets the hit flag (step S626a) and starts displaying the number of prize balls on the background symbol display unit 9c (step S626b). ).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628). After setting these small hit end designation command reception flags, the effect control CPU 201 further clears the hit flag (step S628a) and ends the prize ball number display displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c (step S628a). (Clear the display) (step S628b).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S632). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the prize ball count counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S633), and displays the effect. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 9, control is performed to erase the prize ball number display (step S634).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S635), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S636). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S637). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S638). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S639). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the first KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S640), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S641). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S642). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S643). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S644). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the first KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S645), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S646). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S647). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S648). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display according to the second KT pattern (step S649). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the second KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the first KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S639, S644, and S649 and the processing of step S979 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing described later are executed, so that the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed. The number of prize balls is displayed during the state), but the value of the prize ball counter when the KT state is ended and the low probability / non-KT state is returned by executing the processing of steps S633 and S634. Is reset (cleared to 0) and the display of the number of prize balls ends.

Further, in this embodiment, the process of steps S639 and S644 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the first KT pattern in the first KT state, and the process of step S649 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the second KT state. Although the case where the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the first KT state, the prize ball number display may not be displayed (the processing of steps S639 and S644 is unnecessary).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step S650), the effect control CPU 201 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the large winning opening (step S650). Along with step S651), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) is added to the prize ball counter (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 24. Along with (step S654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 24) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S655).

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball is won in the large winning opening and when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 24 is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large winning opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24. You may.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the customer waiting demonstration display (step S661). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the previous small hit flag indicating that the display result of the previous fluctuation display was a small hit is reset (step S662), and small hits are continuously generated. The small hit continuous number counter indicating the number of hits is cleared to 0 (step S663).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the continuous small hit effect can be executed when the small hits occur continuously, but the processes of steps S662 and S663 are executed. Therefore, if the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after the variable display that is a small hit is executed, the continuous small hit is displayed even if the variable display executed after that is a small hit. The production is configured so that it is not executed.

If the received effect control command is the first general winning opening winning designation command (step S664), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first general winning opening winning flag (step S665), and the winning flag is set. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the prize ball number display is displayed during a big hit or a small hit (S666). If the winning flag is set, the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning the first general winning opening, which is 5, is added to the number of prize balls counter, and then the process proceeds to step S611. In this way, by adding 5 which is the number of prize balls to the prize ball counter, the effect that the number of prize balls after addition is displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c as the number of prize balls is executed. Become. On the other hand, when the hit flag is not set, the prize ball number display is not displayed, so the process proceeds to step S611 without adding the prize ball number 5 to the prize ball number counter.

If the received effect control command is the second general winning opening winning designation command (step S668), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second general winning opening winning flag (step S669), and then goes to step S611. Transition.

If the received effect control command is the third general winning opening winning designation command (step S670), the effect control CPU 201 sets the third general winning opening winning flag (step S671), and then goes to step S611. Transition.

Further, if the received effect control command is another command, for example, a gate passage specification command, the effect control CPU 201 is set, for example, by setting a gate passage specification command reception flag corresponding to the received gate passage specification command. Sets a flag according to the received effect control command, or executes processing (step S672). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S706) shown in FIG. 31. The effect control CPU 201 performs the launch instruction display process of S800 and any of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Launch instruction display process (step S800): When the background symbol display unit 9c is in the jackpot game or in the KT state, a "right-handed" message is displayed and an arrow indicating the right direction is displayed, and the jackpot game or KT is displayed. When not in the state, when either the game ball of the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 passes or the first general winning opening 161 is won, a "left-handed" message is displayed and an arrow indicating the left direction. And are displayed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Background symbol change processing (step S902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 201 may extend the variation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S905).

Process during round (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening indicating that the large winning opening is open (closed) is received, interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the launch instruction display process (step S800). In the launch instruction display process, the effect control CPU 201 first determines whether or not a right-handed instruction image including a "right-handed" message display and an arrow indicating the right direction is being displayed (step S801).

If the right-handed instruction image is not being displayed, it is further determined whether or not the fanfare flag, which is a condition for starting the display of the right-handed instruction image, is set (step S802). If the fanfare flag is set, the left-handed instruction image display period timer is operating to indicate whether or not the left-handed instruction image consisting of the "left-handed" message display and the arrow indicating the left direction is being displayed. It is determined by whether or not (step S803). When the left-handed instruction image display period timer is operating, that is, when the left-handed instruction image is being displayed, the left-handed instruction image display is terminated (step S804), and the left-handed instruction image display period timer is set. After clearing (step S805), the display of the right-handed instruction image is started (step S806), and if the gate passage designation command reception flag is set, it is cleared (step S820), and the launch instruction display process is terminated. .. If the fanfare flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S809.

On the other hand, when the right-handed instruction image is being displayed, it is determined whether or not the low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command reception flag, which is a condition for ending right-handedness, is set (step S807). When the low accuracy / non-KT background specification command reception flag is set, after finishing the display of the right-handed instruction image (erasing the display) (step S808), the process proceeds to step S813 and the left-handed instruction image is displayed. Start displaying. On the other hand, when the low accuracy / non-KT background designation command reception flag is not set, if the gate passage designation command reception flag is set, it is cleared (step S820), and the launch instruction display process is terminated.

In this embodiment, when the display of the right-handed instruction image is finished in step S808, the display of the left-handed instruction image is started immediately, but the left-handed instruction image is displayed for a predetermined period. It may be displayed after a lapse of time, or the left-handed instruction image may be displayed after displaying the preparation display prompting the preparation for left-handedness for a predetermined period.

In step S809, it is determined whether or not the left-handed instruction image display period timer for timing the display period of the left-handed instruction image is operating.

If the left-handed instruction image display period timer is not operating, that is, if the left-handed instruction image is not displayed, whether or not the first general winning opening winning flag is set, that is, the first general winning It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the mouth (step S810). If the first general winning opening winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S813.

Further, when the first general winning opening winning flag is not set, it is further determined whether or not the gate passage designation command reception flag is set (step S811). If the gate passage designation command reception flag is not set, the launch instruction display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the gate passage designation command reception flag is set, the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the display of the left-handed instruction image is started. Then, the timer value corresponding to the display period of the left-handed instruction image is set in the left-handed instruction image display period timer, and the timer is started (step S815). Then, if the gate passage designation command reception flag is set, it is cleared (step S820), and the launch instruction display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the left-handed instruction image display period timer is operating, that is, when the left-handed instruction image is being displayed, after the left-handed instruction image display period timer is set to -1 (step S816) and then subtracted. It is determined whether or not the left-handed instruction image display period timer has expired, that is, whether or not the left-handed instruction image display period has elapsed (step S817).

If the left-handed instruction image display period timer is out, the display of the left-handed instruction image is terminated (erased) (step S818), and after the left-handed instruction image display period timer is cleared (step S819). If the gate passage designation command reception flag is set, it is cleared (step S820), and the launch instruction display process is terminated. When the left-handed instruction image display period timer is not timer-out, if the gate passage designation command reception flag is set, it is cleared (step S820), and the launch instruction display process is terminated.

By executing the above launch instruction display process, the right-handed instruction image is displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c when the jackpot game is in progress or in the KT state, and the gate 32 is not in the jackpot game or in the KT state. Alternatively, when either the game ball of the operating gate 17 passes or the first general winning opening 161 is won, the left-handed instruction image is displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c for a predetermined period.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols do not match completely match. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the same combination as the reach-out symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a small hit (step S921). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a small hit is determined by, for example, the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step S618) indicating the small hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not (whether or not the display result 7 designated command is stored).

If the variation display started this time is a small hit (Y in step S921), it is confirmed whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S922). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S931. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit flag was set last time (step S923). If the small hit flag was not set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time was not a small hit), the effect control CPU 201 indicates that small hits have occurred continuously. As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect to be notified, the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit is selected (step S924). On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is a small hit and small hits occur continuously), the effect control CPU 201 As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect, a continuous small hit effect determination table corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits is selected ( Step S925).

In this embodiment, the process of step S922 is executed so that the continuous small hit effect can be executed only in the second KT state, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the continuous small hit effect may be configured to be executable in both the first KT state and the second KT state.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in steps S924 and S925, and determines the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect (step S926).

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 38A shows a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit selected in step S924. Further, FIG. 38B shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 1 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S925 (that is, 2 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for two consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 38C shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 2 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S925 (that is, 3 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for three consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 38 (D) shows the case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 3 or more in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S925 (that is, continuously in the fluctuation display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for a number of consecutive small hits of 4 times or more) selected for (when small hits occur 4 times or more) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the continuous small hit effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect A, the continuous small hit effect B, and the continuous small hit effect C. There is. In this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect A is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character A appears on the effect display device 9 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character A. .. Further, the continuous small hit effect B is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character B appears on the effect display device 9 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character B. Further, the continuous small hit effect C is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character C appears on the effect display device 9 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character C.

In this embodiment, the case where the type of the character is different depending on the type of the continuous small hit effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the type of character display may be different or the display color of character display may be different depending on the type of continuous small hit effect. Further, as the continuous small hit effect, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 25 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be executed, or the effect of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 27 may be executed, and various as the continuous small hit effect. It is possible to produce various aspects.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which three types of continuous small hit effects A to C can be executed, but not limited to such a mode, four or more types of continuous small hit effects are continuously small. The hit effect may be configured to be executable, or only two types of continuous small hit effects may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that there is only one type of continuous small hit effect.

As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the previous fluctuation display was not a small hit (that is, when continuous small hits did not occur), there was no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 100%. It is determined. In this embodiment, if the previous variation display is not a small hit, the continuous small hit effect is not executed. Therefore, when it is determined as N in step S923, it is as it is. It may be configured to move to step S931. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), when small hits occur twice in succession in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect B and the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low ratio.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), when small hits occur three times in a row in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without continuous small hits, and at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, and it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 50%. That is, the continuous small hit effect B is executed at a relatively high rate. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), when small hits occur four or more times in succession in the current fluctuation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and a rate of 10%. Is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 20%, and is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect C at a rate of 50%. .. That is, the continuous small hit effect C is executed at a relatively high rate.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect A already being executed in the second continuous small hit fluctuation is high, FIGS. 38 (C) and 38 (D) As shown in the above, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect A is set to be low in the small hit fluctuation of the third and subsequent times in a row. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect B already being executed in the third consecutive small hit fluctuation is high, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), the fourth or more consecutive small hits or more. In the small hit fluctuation, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect B is set to be low. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it becomes difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the allocation of the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIG. 38 makes it difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the continuous small hit effect A is executed, a flag indicating that the continuous small hit effect A has been executed is set, and when the continuous small hit effect is continuously displayed, the flag is set. If the flag is set, a type of continuous small hit effect other than the continuous small hit effect A may be configured to be executable.

Further, in this embodiment, when the previous variation display is a small hit (when small hits occur continuously), the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 38 (B) to 38 (D) is used. Although the case is shown in which the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined by executing the lottery process, the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, when the previous variation display is a small hit, the continuous small hit effect may be unconditionally executed without performing the lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, a case is shown in which the type of the continuous small hit effect to be executed from the plurality of types of continuous small hit effects A to C is determined by the lottery process. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the type of continuous small hit effect may be fixedly determined according to the number of consecutive small hits. For example, if it is the second small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect A is fixedly determined, if it is the third small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect B is fixedly determined, and the small hits of the fourth or more consecutive times are determined. If it is a hit, the continuous small hit effect C may be fixedly determined.

When it is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect (Y in step S927), the effect control CPU 201 determines the variation pattern and determination of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table corresponding to the type of continuous small hit effect is selected (step S928). Then, the process proceeds to step S932.

In this embodiment, the process table selected in step S928 is used to execute the processes of step S933 and step S944 of the background symbol variation processing, which will be described later, so that the effect display device 9 continuously displays the background symbol variation. A small hit effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when a small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is always performed (in this example, the fluctuation display is performed). As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, only the second variation pattern # 27 of the shortened variation is provided), and when the continuous small hit effect is executed, it is always possible. It is configured to be executed in the variable display of the shortened variation. Even if a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the variation pattern may be configured to have a long variation time (for example, 20 seconds). In this case, for example, in the background symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 37, when the variation display this time is a small hit variation, it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern is a shortened variation. The process of steps S922 to S928 may be executed only when the pattern is a variation pattern to enable the continuous small hit effect to be executed.

Unless the fluctuation display started this time is a small hit (N in step S921), the effect control CPU 201 resets the previous small hit flag (step S929) if it is set, and the number of consecutive small hits. The value of the counter is cleared to 0 (step S930).

After clearing the small hit continuous number counter in step S930, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step S922), or if it is decided not to execute the continuous small hit effect (N in step S927). The effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S931). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S932). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S933). For example, the background symbol display unit 9c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation patterns # 26 and # 28), step S933 and the background symbol variation described later are being performed according to the process table selected in steps S928 and S931. By executing the process of step S944 of the process, the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol. Further, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 16, # 18, # 19, # 21, # 23, # 24, # 28), steps S928 and S931 By executing the process of step S933 and step S944 of the background symbol changing process described later according to the process table selected in the above, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol variation display.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S934). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S935).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S950, for example, when the effect control CPU 201 is executing the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of order is started, the background symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Then, if the background symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S983. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S982. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S983 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is controlled (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern (step S979). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control is performed to newly start the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the first KT pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the display of the number of prize balls by the jackpot pattern is started or switched (see step S979) in the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 40, but only in such an embodiment. Absent. For example, in the jackpot display processing (step S904), the first round processing after starting the jackpot game (step S905), and the like, the same processing as in step S979 is performed to start or switch the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern. It may be configured as follows.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S980).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S981), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S982).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S983). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S984). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S985). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S986), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is controlled (step S987).

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908) (step S988).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S981), the effect control CPU 201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S989).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S9202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S9203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. In step S9207, if the effect control CPU 201 is not set, the previous small hit flag is set (step S9207). Further, the effect control CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step S9208).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the variation display other than the small hit is started, the previous small hit flag is reset and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is cleared to 0 (see steps S929 and S930). ). Therefore, if the small hit game is executed based on the first variation display that becomes the small hit after executing the variation display other than the small hit, the processing of steps S9207 and S9208 is executed, so that the previous time. The small hit flag is set and 1 is set in the small hit continuous number counter. Therefore, if the small hit occurs again in the next fluctuation display, it can be determined that the small hit has occurred twice in succession based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter being 1. Then, when the small hit continuous number counter value is updated to 2 by executing step S9208 by ending the small hit game, and the small hit is made again in the next fluctuation display, the small hit continuous Based on the value of the number counter being 2, it can be determined that small hits have occurred three times in a row. After that, even if small hits occur four times, five times, and so on, by checking the value of the small hit continuous number counter, it is possible to determine how many small hits have occurred continuously. Can be determined.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9209).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a general winning opening winning sound output process (step S707). In the general winning opening winning sound output processing, the effect control CPU 201 first determines whether or not the winning sound output process timer is operating, that is, whether or not the winning sound due to the general winning is already being output. (Step S581).

When the process timer for outputting the winning sound is not operating, that is, when the winning sound due to the general winning is not being output, it is determined whether or not the first general winning opening winning flag is set (step S582). When the first general winning opening winning flag is set, that is, when the first general winning opening 161 is won, the first general winning opening sound for notifying the winning of the first general winning opening 161 is output. The process data for outputting the winning sound of the first general winning opening is selected (step S583), and the process proceeds to step S592.

On the other hand, if the first general winning opening winning flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second general winning opening winning flag is set (step S584). If the second general winning opening winning flag is set, the second general winning opening winning flag is cleared (step S585), and whether or not the special gaming state is in progress, that is, the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. , It is determined whether or not it is in any of the first KT state and the second KT state. It should be noted that whether or not these gaming states are present can be determined by whether or not the hitting flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag are set.

If the game state is not in the special game state in which the right-handed instruction image is displayed, that is, in the game state in which the right-handed instruction image is not displayed, the process data for outputting the second general winning opening winning sound is displayed. After selecting (step S587), the process proceeds to step S592.

On the other hand, if the game state is in the special gaming state in which the right-handed instruction image is displayed, the right-handed instruction image is displayed by ending the general winning opening winning sound output process. 2 The winning sound is not output even if the general winning opening 162 is won.

If it is determined in step S584 that the second general winning opening winning flag is not set, it is further determined whether or not the third general winning opening winning flag is set (step S588). When the third general winning opening winning flag is set, the third general winning opening winning flag is cleared (step S589), and whether or not the player is in the special gaming state is determined in the same manner as in step S586 described above. To do.

When the game state is not in the special gaming state in which the right-handed instruction image is displayed, that is, in the game state in which the right-handed instruction image is not displayed, a prize for notifying the winning of the third general winning opening is given. After selecting the process data for outputting the winning sound of the third general winning opening for outputting the sound (step S591), the process proceeds to step S592.

On the other hand, if the game state is in the special gaming state in which the right-handed instruction image is displayed, the right-handed instruction image is displayed by ending the general winning opening winning sound output process. 3 Even if the general winning opening 163 is won, the winning sound is not output.

In step S592, after starting the winning sound output process timer for switching the process data, the winning sound output is started according to the contents of the winning sound output process data 1 (step S593).

In this way, in the state where the right-handed instruction image is not displayed, the first general winning opening winning sound is obtained according to the winning of the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163. By setting the output process data, the second general winning opening winning sound output process data, and the third general winning opening winning sound output process data, different winning sounds are output, so the player is a general player. With these winning sounds, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not a prize has been won in the winning opening while playing a game. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp which general winning opening is easy to win or difficult to win depending on which winning sound is output more or less.

Further, in the state where the right-handed instruction image is displayed, even if the player wins the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 in which only the game ball passing through the left-handed path can win a prize, the winning sound Is not output, so even if you win the 2nd general winning opening 162 or the 3rd general winning opening 163 while the right-handed instruction image is displayed, the number of winning balls display does not increase, but only the winning sound is heard. By being output, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in step S581, when it is determined that the winning sound output process timer is operating, that is, when the winning sound due to the general winning is being output, after the winning sound output process timer is set to -1. (Step S594), it is determined whether or not the process timer for outputting the winning sound after the subtraction has timed out (step S595).

If the winning sound output process timer is not timered out, the winning sound is output according to the contents of the winning sound output process data corresponding to the value of the winning sound output process timer (step S599), and the general winning is obtained. Ends the winning sound output process. On the other hand, when the winning sound output process timer runs out, the winning sound output process data is switched (step S596), the next winning sound output process timer is started (step S597), and the next After the winning sound is output according to the contents of the winning sound output process data (step S598), the general winning opening winning sound output process is terminated. If there is no process data for outputting the winning sound to be switched next in step S596, the output of the winning sound by the process data for outputting the winning sound ends.

If there is a new general prize before the output of the prize sound is completed, the output of the prize sound corresponding to the new general prize is started when the output of the prize sound being output is completed. To.

43 to 47 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S708). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening is winning), the effect control CPU 201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S501), and the first prize It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S502). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is the effect ball at the first speed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S503). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S504). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or during the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big prize opening When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 or the special winning opening 24, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased one by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game. It is an effect that is executed in such a way as to do. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this embodiment, the fact that the big winning opening winning flag is set (a winning in the big winning opening has occurred) means that the big hit game is in progress and the number of prize balls displayed by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S503, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 201 is set whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S505). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S502 or step S505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is started) (step S506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S507). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize balls at the first speed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S508). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball counter. However, when the processes of steps S500 to S509 are executed, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (this example). Then, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for one prize in the large prize opening. The number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is performed only up to, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls will continue to increase is displayed. We, the first prize ball increase production will continue to be executed until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By the end of the production, the number of prize balls will increase.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if winning the special winning opening 24 has occurred), the effect control CPU 201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S511), and the second KT It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process proceeds to step S551.

In step S551, it is determined whether or not the first general winning opening winning flag is set. When the 1st general winning opening winning flag is set, the set 1st general winning opening winning flag is cleared (step S552), and the winning ball number display is displayed in the big hit state or small hit. Whether or not it is in the state is determined by whether or not the hit flag is set (step S553).

If the hit flag is not set, that is, if the prize ball number display is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S540 (FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the winning flag is set, that is, when the prize ball number display is displayed, it is determined whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (step S554). .. If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is started (step S555), and the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. (Step S556), the process proceeds to step S540 (FIG. 47).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S551 that the first general winning opening winning flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the first winning ball increase effect executing flag is set (step S557). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 increases the number of prize balls by 1 in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started) (step S558). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S559). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize balls at the first speed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start (restart) the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S560). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.
On the other hand, if the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 clears the first prize ball increase effect executing flag. (Step S561), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special prize opening 24 during the non-KT state, the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, so that the prize ball increase effect is performed. The process ends as it is.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, during the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S514). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is the effect ball at the first speed in the effect display device 9. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S515). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the second prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S516). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S515, the first KT pattern is used. In the displayed number of prize balls display, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 24), the third prize ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S518). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S514 or step S518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S520). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize balls at the first speed on the effect display device 9. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S521). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and immediately. 15 is added to the prize ball counter (see step S655), but the prize ball number display may be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S510 to S522. Instead, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed for one prize in the special prize opening 24 in the first KT state. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is completed. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S512 (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the effect effect (step S523). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S525). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

If the winning effect execution flag is not set (that is, the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 9 (for example, character display such as "+15"). Is performed (step S526), and the effect display device 9 is controlled to start the winning effect (step S527). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the winning effect execution flag (step S528). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S529). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S533.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S530). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S531). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the third prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S532). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S531, the second KT pattern is used. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S517 or step S529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the effect effect (step S534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize balls at the second speed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls (step S537). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the second KT pattern on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S538). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball counter (see step S655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S510, S517, S529 to S532, S535-S359. The number of prize balls is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds x 15 = 7.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed for one prize in the special prize opening 24 in the second KT state. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase production is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls additionally generated).

Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. In some cases, the production in which the number of all prize balls increases may not be completed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S708) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the 3rd prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the 3rd prize will be displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect execution flag is set (step S540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, setting a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect when starting the winning effect in step S527, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the winning effect (step S542).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S544). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) (step S545), and starts the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball. Control is performed (step S546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S547).

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S524 to S528 and S540 to S547 is executed and a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a prize-winning effect is executed. In this case, a new prize may be generated for the next special prize opening 24 during the execution of the prize production, but in such a case, the prize is waited until the execution of the prize production is completed. After the executing prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are displayed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S708) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is completed. The prize ball increase display and the winning effect are executed (furthermore, the prize ball increase display and the winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display in between).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 24 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 24 is won. (See steps S523, S533, S534).

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display effect (step S708) is configured as an effect to be executed in the effect control main process, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the background symbol process process, the step The prize ball number display effect (step S708) may be executed before the processes of S900 to S908 are executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display or a prize production is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24. For example, the special prize opening lamp 24a is further used. It may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, there is a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 24, and the effect that the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a game machine configured to be provided with a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls is paid out without opening the variable winning ball device even if a prize is won). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is entered in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a directing effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. 48 to 51 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 48 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 49 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 50 and 51 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 48 to 51, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 48, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 48 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 300 according to the jackpot pattern (see step S979), and for example, the character 301 is displayed. Then, a character display 302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 301. Further, a right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 9 (see step S806 in FIG. 36). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the prize ball number display 300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 300 based on the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S500 to S509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 48 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S639 and S644), and a small hit. When is generated, for example, a character display 304 such as "small hit has occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, as the prize ball number display 303 according to the first KT pattern, the case where the prize ball number display 303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. ing. A right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display device 9 (see step S806 in FIG. 36).

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 49B, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the second prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S510 to S522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 49 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (A), in the second KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 305 according to the second KT pattern (see step S649), and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a character display 306 such as "small hit has occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the prize ball number display 305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 305 according to the second KT pattern. It is shown. A right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display device 9 (see step S806 in FIG. 36).

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 305 is started (see step S530). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (B), as an effect effect, a case where a predetermined effect image 307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 305 is shown. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 24, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S526) and a prize effect is started (see step S527). In the example shown in FIG. 50B, there is a case where a predetermined character 308 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 309 such as "+15" is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed is started in the effect display device 9, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 3 is started (steps S510, S517, S529). (See S539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 (C) to 51 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect is completed as shown in FIG. 51 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect is completed as shown in FIG. 51 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the prize ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S526) and the prize is won, as shown in FIG. 51 (H), based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting prize effect. The production is started (see step S527).

Then, after that, the second prize ball increase effect is performed until all the prize ball number displays including the number of prize balls based on the prizes to the special prize opening 24 additionally generated in FIG. Will be executed. Even when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 9.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, as an effect effect, an effect image 307 having a glittering mode is displayed around the prize ball number display 305, but the effect is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, as an effect effect, it may be configured to perform an effect that acts on the prize ball number display 305 in some form, such as displaying an image in a mode that covers the prize ball number display 305. By acting on the prize ball number display 305 in this way, an effect that makes the prize ball number display 305 difficult to see may be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls. Not limited to this, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 50 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the big hit game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the big hit game. It may be configured to add up and display the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state until the KT state is terminated and the non-KT state is entered. It may be configured. According to the aspect (2), the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state can be recognized, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 52 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 52, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 24 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S510, S517, S529 to S539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S523). Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 52, in the small hit game in the second KT state, if a second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the number of prize balls increased by the second prize is taken over, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 52. In addition, after finishing the winning effect for the first prize, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to the closed state and the small hit game is completed, all the prize ball number displays are updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning effects are not finished, as shown in FIG. 52, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increase production and the winning production.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect. In FIG. 53, for example, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A) and (B-1). At the start timing of the variation display, which is a small hit, the variation display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right is started as shown in FIG. 53 (A). In this case, the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the variable display is started (see step S926). Since the continuous small hit effect is an effect that can be executed only in the second KT state, the right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 9.

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, when the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect is reached during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 53 (B-1), a predetermined character is displayed in the effect display device 9. Along with the appearance of the A310, the continuous small hit effect A is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character A310.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (B-2). Character B312 appears, and a continuous small hit effect B is executed in a mode of displaying a character display 311 such as "one more time!" As a line of the character B312.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (B-3). Along with the appearance of the character C313, the continuous small hit effect C is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character C313.

Next, the production timing of the continuous small hit effect will be described. FIG. 54 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect. As shown in FIG. 54 (A), in this embodiment, even if a small hit occurs, if small hits are not continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays (before and after the fluctuation display that has become a small hit). The continuous small hit effect is configured to be infeasible (see steps S929 and S930), such as when the small hit occurs only once, such as when the variable display of is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), when small hits occur continuously in a plurality of fluctuation displays, a continuous small hit effect is produced in the second and subsequent fluctuation displays in which small hits occur continuously. It is feasible (see steps S921-S928). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the second and subsequent variable displays in which small hits are continuously generated are started (step). (See S926), when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed during the variable display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), a case is shown in which a continuous small hit effect can be executed during the fluctuation display in which a small hit occurs, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, the continuous small hit effect may be executed over the small hit game period after the end of the variation display in which the small hit occurs.

Next, a specific example of the effect mode when the first general winning opening 161 is won when the right-handed instruction image is displayed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where a game ball wins a prize in the first general winning opening 161 provided on the right-handed path in the fifth round in the jackpot game. In FIG. 55, for example, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 55 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 300 according to the jackpot pattern (see step S979), and for example, the character 301 is displayed. Then, a character display 302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 301. Further, a right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 9 (see step S806 in FIG. 36). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the prize ball number display 300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 300 based on the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize has been awarded to the first general winning opening 161. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the sound of "piyo", which is a winning sound for notifying that the first general winning opening 161 has been won, is output, and the effect display device 9 displays the first. The effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is executed at one speed, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S551 to S561 in FIG. 45). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 55 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends. As shown in FIG. 55 (A), even if the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 is won in the jackpot game state in which the right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed, the winning is won. The winning sound notifying that there is a prize is not output, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is not executed in the effect display device 9.

Next, the case where the game ball wins the first general winning opening 161 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 56. In FIG. 56, for example, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). In the example shown in FIG. 56A, when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S639 and S644), and a small hit. When is generated, for example, a character display 304 such as "small hit has occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, as the prize ball number display 303 according to the first KT pattern, the case where the prize ball number display 303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. ing. A right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display device 9 (see step S806 in FIG. 36).

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the first general winning opening 161 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the sound of "piyo", which is a winning sound for notifying that the first general winning opening 161 has been won, is output, and the effect display device 9 displays the first The effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is executed at one speed, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S551 to S561 in FIG. 45). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 56 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends. As shown in FIG. 56A, even if there is a prize in the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 in the small hit game state in which the right-handed instruction image 320 is displayed, a prize is won. The winning sound notifying that there is a prize is not output, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is not executed in the effect display device 9.

Next, the case where the left-handed instruction image 321 is displayed will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 57. Also in FIG. 57, the screen modes change in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

FIG. 57A shows a state in which the variable display is executed when the game state is a low probability / non-KT state, that is, in a state where the right-handed instruction image 320 is not displayed on the effect display device 9. Has been done.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the first general winning opening 161 during the variable display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the sound of "piyo", which is a winning sound for notifying that the first general winning opening 161 has been won, is output, and the upper part of the effect display device 9 is output. The display of the left-handed instruction image 321 is started in the left corner. In FIG. 57, winning a prize in the first general winning opening 161 is described as an example, but even when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, the left-handed instruction image 321 is similarly displayed. Is started (however, the winning sound is not output).

Then, when a certain period of time has elapsed since the display of the left-handed instruction image 321 was started, the display of the left-handed instruction image 321 is terminated (erased).

In this embodiment, a mode in which a winning sound is output when a winning is generated in the first general winning opening 161 when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and if a prize is generated in the first general winning opening 161 when the gaming state is a low probability non-KT state, the winning sound may not be output.

(Modification example 1)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 59. The description of the same configuration as that of the above embodiment and the overlapping configuration will be omitted.

In the above-described embodiment, different winning sounds are output for the purpose of making it possible to recognize which of the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163 is a prize. In order to enable this, three production control commands corresponding to the first general winning opening 161, the second general winning opening 162, and the third general winning opening 163 (first general winning opening winning designation command, second general winning opening) A form using the winning designation command and the third general winning opening winning designation command) is illustrated, but in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 58, the first general winning opening 161 and the second general winning opening 162, By winning a prize in the third general winning opening 163, the general winning opening winning designation command of 1 which is a common production control command is executed to execute the general winning opening winning notification process shown in FIG. 59 and transmitted to the production control board 80. Therefore, the number of effect control commands may be reduced, and the control load on the effect control board 80 side due to the transmission of unnecessary effect control commands may also be reduced.

Specifically, in the general winning opening winning notification process of the modified example, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first general winning opening switch 16a is turned on, that is, only the game ball passing through the right-handed path wins. It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the possible first general winning opening 161 (step S401). When the first general winning opening switch 16a is on, the general winning opening winning designation command is transmitted (step S402) to notify the effect control microcomputer 200 that there is a general winning opening. By transmitting these general prize opening prize designation commands, a prize sound for notifying that there is a general prize is output regardless of the game state, and a prize is given during the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When the number of balls display is displayed, the prize ball increase effect of increasing the number of prize balls is executed.

On the other hand, when the first general winning opening switch 16a is off, whether or not the right-handed instruction image is displayed in the special gaming state, that is, the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, the first KT state, It is determined whether or not the game is in any of the second KT states (step S403). It should be noted that whether or not these gaming states are present can be determined by whether or not the hitting flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag are set.

Then, when the right-handed instruction image is not displayed in the special gaming state, whether or not the second general winning opening switch 16b or the third general winning opening switch 16c is turned on, that is, the second general winning opening. It is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in 162 or the third general winning opening 163 (step S404). If the second general winning opening switch 16b or the third general winning opening switch 16c is not turned on, the general winning opening winning sound output process is terminated. Further, when the second general winning opening switch 16b or the third general winning opening switch 16c is turned on, a general winning opening winning designation command is transmitted (step S402) to the effect control microcomputer 200. And notify that there was a general prize. As a result, when the player is not in the special gaming state, the winning sound is output according to the winning of the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163.

On the other hand, when the right-handed instruction image is displayed in the special gaming state, it is general without determining whether or not the second general winning opening switch 16b or the third general winning opening switch 16c is turned on. Winning opening Winning notification processing ends. Therefore, when the right-handed instruction image is displayed in the special gaming state, the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163, in which only the game ball passing through the left-handed path can win a prize, is awarded. Even if there is, the general prize opening prize designation command is not sent, so even during the big hit game state or small hit game state where the prize ball number display is displayed, the prize ball increase effect that increases the number of prize balls is executed. In addition to not being played, the winning sound notifying the winning of the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 is not output, so for example, the prize ball is during the big hit game or the small hit game. When the number display is displayed, even if the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 is won, the winning ball number display does not increase, but only the winning sound is output. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In this modification 1, the general winning opening is designated by winning the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 during the entire period when the right-handed instruction image is displayed in the special gaming state. Although the transmission of commands is restricted, the general winning opening prize designation by winning the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163 only during the big hit game or the small hit game in which the prize ball number display is displayed. To limit the transmission of commands to limit the execution of the prize ball increase effect that increases the number of prize balls, and to limit the output of the prize sound due to winning to the second general prize opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163. It may be.

(Modification 2)
Next, the gaming machine according to the second modification will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above embodiment and the overlapping configuration will be omitted. The modification 2 may be executed in combination with the modification 1.

The gaming machine according to the second modification has a look-ahead determination function of the pending inner consecutive villa, and depending on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, for a predetermined period, for example, four upper limits of the number of pending memories from the end of the jackpot game state. In the period until the four variable displays by the hold memory are executed, the hold inner villa effect suggesting the possibility of the hold inner villa may be continuously executed from the jackpot game state. As a specific effect of the pending villa, a look-ahead judgment is made according to the starting prize during the big hit game, and a special image (for example, a character image or a background image) is displayed based on the determination result. The special video is not erased even after the big hit ends, but is continuously displayed until the big hit is achieved by the variable display by the already stored hold storage, so that the special video continues until the next big hit. The effect may be displayed.

In order to realize the look-ahead determination function of the pending villa, the game control microcomputer 560 may execute the look-ahead determination process. As the look-ahead determination process, for each hold memory corresponding to the four variable displays executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the random value (random 1) extracted at the time of storing the hold memory and the jackpot determination shown in FIG. By comparing with the judgment value in the table, it may be judged whether or not it is determined as a big hit.

Then, when it is determined in the look-ahead determination process that there is a hold memory that is a big hit in the hold memory, the hold inner consecutive villa effect is executed at a high rate, and when it is determined that the hold memory does not exist. It is only necessary not to execute the pending villa production.

In this way, in the gaming machine in the form of executing the hold inner consecutive villa production, the high probability / first KT state controlled to the high probability state during the period of the hold inner consecutive villa production until the next big hit occurs. , When the first general winning opening 161 is won in the second KT state, the prize ball number increase effect is not executed, but the low probability / first KT state is not controlled to the high probability state. When there is a prize in the first general prize opening 161, the number of prize balls erased according to the end of the game state of the immediately preceding jackpot is displayed, and the number of prize balls by winning the first general prize opening 161 is displayed. The increase effect may be executed, and by doing so, in the case of a high probability / low probability / first KT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first KT state or the second KT state, the pending internal ream By paying attention to whether or not the first general prize opening 161 is won within the period of the villa production (predetermined period), it is possible to improve the effect of the production during the period of the pending villa production (predetermined period). , You can improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is executed, it will be confirmed that the villa will be on hold, so that the motivation to win the prize in the first general prize opening 161 can be improved. it can.

In addition, although the above-mentioned modification 2 exemplifies the mode of executing the hold inner consecutive villa effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first general without executing the hold inner consecutive villa effect. It is also possible to execute only the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by winning the winning opening 161. At this time, as the effect of increasing the number of prize balls, if it is determined in the look-ahead determination process that there is a hold memory that is a big hit in the hold memory, it is executed at a high rate, and it is determined that the hold memory does not exist. If so, it may be executed at a low rate or not executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the holding inner consecutive villa effect and the prize ball number increase effect are executed in the first KT state and the second KT state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead of these 1st KT state and 2nd KT state, the winning frequency to the variable winning ball device 15 having the 2nd starting winning opening 14 is higher than when the 1st frequency (low frequency) is used. Frequency) is controlled to a high frequency state (high base state) in which the base, which is the ratio of the number of game balls fired in a unit period to the number of game balls paid out, increases. May be good.

In addition, in a high base state in which the base, which is the ratio of the number of game balls fired in a unit period to the number of game balls paid out, increases, the game may or may not be in the KT state. It may be a machine, and in such a game machine, in the high base state which is the KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed and the prize ball number increase effect is executed, but the high is not in the KT state. In the base state, the prize ball number display may not be displayed so that the prize ball number increase effect is not executed.

As described above, according to the above-described embodiment and each modification, when the right-handed instruction image, which is a promotion effect, is displayed in the special gaming state, for example, the hand holding the steering wheel Even if the game ball is loosened by a long operation and the game ball is launched into the left-handed path and a prize is generated in the second general winning opening 162 or the third general winning opening 163, these second general winning openings 162 or It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the occurrence of a prize in the third general winning opening 163.

Further, according to the above-described embodiment and each modification, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a predetermined path among the flow paths through which the game medium flows down. (In this example, a specific area (in this example, the operating gate 17) provided in the game area 7 on the right side) through which the game medium can pass, and predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). After the establishment of, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560). When it is Y in step S2501 (the part where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. (In this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), it is possible to control to a special game state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that in the normal state. (In this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2212A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. A predetermined promotion notification (first instruction notification in this example) for promoting firing is executed, and after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification, the game medium is launched into a specific area. It was decided that the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) can be executed (in this example, the portion where steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through a specific area is described, and the game machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control the advantageous state. However, if a notification for prompting the launch of the game medium to a specific area is performed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production may become complicated. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state ends and the normal state is entered, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long, so that the second special symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the fluctuation of. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control so as not to be in the big hit game state during the break by appropriately notifying the opportunity to control the big hit game state.

Further, unlike the game machine described above, there is a game machine having a configuration in which the jackpot game state is controlled on condition that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the operating gate 17. , The player waits until the jackpot game state starts (until the jackpot is opened) after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of suppressing wasteful hitting of the game ball, and then launches the game ball. May be done. Similarly, in a game machine that shifts to the jackpot game state on the condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate 17, such a player also has a game ball from the time when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game state is started. It may try to wait for launch, in which case the jackpot game state will not start. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of the opportunity to control the jackpot game state.

Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, the effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a decorative lamp 25, a light emitting member such as a frame lamp 28a to 28c) may be used as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. Further, the effect members used for the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, in the predetermined promotion notification, light emitting members such as the decorative lamp 25 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be made to emit light, and in the specific promotion notification, the predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the first general winning opening winning designation command, the second general winning opening winning designation command, and the third general are irrespective of whether or not the right-handed instruction image is displayed in the special gaming state. The winning opening winning designation command is sent, and if it is the 1st general winning opening winning designation command, the prize ball increase effect is executed, but for the 2nd general winning opening winning designation command and the 3rd general winning opening winning designation command, the winning ball is executed. In a form in which the increase effect is not executed, that is, without restricting the transmission of the effect control command from the main board 31, the effect control board 80 (microcomputer 200 for effect control) executes the prize ball increase effect and the winning sound. Although the form of limiting the output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in the above-described modification, when the right-handed command image is displayed in a special gaming state. , 2nd general winning opening winning designation command, 3rd general winning opening winning designation command (or left general winning opening winning designation command common to 2nd general winning opening 162 and 3rd general winning opening 163) By limiting the transmission of, the control load on the effect control board 80 side due to the transmission of unnecessary effect control commands may be reduced, and the execution of the prize ball increase effect and the output of the winning sound may be restricted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the prize ball number display is displayed only in the big hit game state or the small hit game state among the special game states in which the right-handed instruction image is displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball number display is always continuously displayed during the period during the special gaming state, and the prize ball number display is also always displayed when the right-handed instruction image is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the winning sound is output, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning sound may not be output.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, one general winning opening is provided in the right-handed path and two general winning openings are provided in the left-handed path. The number of these general winning openings, the position where they are arranged, and the like may be appropriately determined.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, a mode in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first The variable display of only one of the special symbol and the second special symbol may be exclusively executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the prize ball number display is terminated (erased) when the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends, that is, the prize ball is used in the ending effect of the big hit or the small hit. Although the form in which the number display is not displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the background designation transmitted when the jackpot game state ends and the first variable display is executed. By ending (erasing) the prize ball number display when the command is received, the prize ball number display may be displayed even in the ending effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, a mode in which the prize ball number display is not displayed in the KT is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is also awarded in these KT states. The number of balls may be displayed and the prize ball number increase effect may be executed. In this case, instead of displaying the prize ball number display for all KT states and executing the prize ball number increase effect, a specific KT state, for example, a second KT state (high probability state and base). For (low base state with low), the prize ball number display is displayed and the prize ball number increase effect is executed, and the first KT state (high probability state and high base state, or low probability state and high base state) is performed. For (base state), the prize ball number display may be displayed so that the prize ball number increase effect is not executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, a game machine in which a small hit occurs is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even a game machine in which these small hits do not occur. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, when the right-handed instruction image is not displayed, the right-handed hit is made and the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, and the first general winning opening 161 Although the embodiment in which the left-handed instruction image is displayed for a predetermined period in response to winning a prize is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these left-handed instruction images may not be displayed. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the right-handed notification and the left-handed notification promotion notification are executed in the form of displaying the instruction image on the effect display device 9, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, these promotion notifications may be executed by outputting by voice, lighting a dedicated lamp, combining these, and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, a mode in which a right-handed instruction image is always displayed in a special gaming state is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the right-handed instruction image is displayed. If the second general winning opening winning designation command or the third general winning opening winning designation command is not received by the lapse of a predetermined time after the display, the display of the right-handed instruction image is terminated and these right-handed instruction images are displayed. Even if the right-handed instruction image is displayed again when the second general winning opening winning designation command or the third general winning opening winning designation command is received in the special game state after the display of is finished. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, a gaming machine having an operating gate 17 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine not having these operating gates 17 may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 200 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown in the above, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 200 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 200 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 200 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, "different proportions" means only those having different proportions due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. Not limited to this, the concept includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols, background symbols (decorative symbols), and ordinary symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. However, the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. The circuit to be controlled may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another substrate ( For example, a sound / lamp having a function of a circuit mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the audio output board 70 shown in FIG. 4 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control board (board) and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control in response to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, a pachinko machine that uses a game ball as a game medium as a game machine is taken as an example, but in the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a game is played. When a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of symbols are used. It can also be applied to slot machines where medals are paid out to players.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, an example is obtained in which a game medium is used as a game machine, but the game machine according to the present invention is limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes. However, it can also be applied to an enclosed game machine in which a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot, and the game machine is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends based on the determination that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot. However, it is not limited to such a game machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in a special variable winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine that is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The embodiment also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a gaming machine configured so that the counting display can be updated and displayed based on a predetermined opportunity. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-64296, when a game ball enters the normal winning opening, the first normal winning transmission effect of displaying the character information of "+3" and outputting the sound "charine" is executed. Then, when the character information of "00003pt" is displayed as the payout point P1 and then the game ball enters the first variable winning device, the character information of "+15" is displayed and the sound effect "Zukyun" is output. It is described that the second normal winning transmission effect is executed and the character information (cumulative counting display) of "00018pt" is displayed as the payout point P1.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-64296, no consideration is given to the mode of updating and displaying the counting display, and there is room for improvement regarding the updated display of the counting display. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, the game machine capable of playing a game as the game machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem is a game machine capable of playing a game, and has a predetermined opportunity (for example, a big prize opening or a prize opening). A portion for executing step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200, which can update and display the count display (for example, the number of prize balls display) based on the fact that the game ball has won the special prize opening 24). ), The counting display executing means has a first pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the first period, and the period until the updated counting result is displayed is longer than the first period. The count display can be updated and displayed by the second pattern, which is the second period (for example, when the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the prize balls are displayed at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second). When the number is displayed to be increased by 1 and the prize ball number display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). It is characterized by that. According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 2 of the second invention, a state control means (for example, a state control means (for example) capable of controlling a plurality of states including at least a first state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a second state (for example, a second KT state). , The portion for executing steps S305 to S307, S355 to S357, S2208A, and S2210B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the counting display executing means is based on the first pattern when controlled to the first state. The count display can be updated and displayed, and when it is controlled to the second state, the count display can be updated and displayed by the second pattern (for example, in the big hit game state, the number of prize balls displayed by the big hit pattern is displayed. Even if it is configured to increase the number of prize balls by 1 in 300, and to increase the number of prize balls by 1 in the prize ball number display 305 displayed by the second KT pattern in the second KT state). Good. According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

Further, as the game machine of the means 3 of the second invention, the state control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous for the player (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a game control microcomputer 560. Steps S358 to S360 are executed), and as the first state, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a jackpot game state) having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is Based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (for example, the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved) as the second state (the part where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), compared to before the special condition is satisfied. It is configured so that it can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state (for example, the second KT state) is increased (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a portion that executes steps S2208A and S2210B). May be good. According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 4 of the second invention, when the game machine is controlled to a special state, the winning frequency of the game medium is lower than that when the game machine is controlled to a specific state (for example, a big hit game state). In the second KT state, it is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls in one small hit game, while a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round). When the display executing means is controlled to a special state, the count display is updated and displayed at a slower update speed than when it is controlled to a specific state (for example, a prize is given by a jackpot pattern in a jackpot game state). When displaying the number of balls display 300, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the number of prize balls display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern in the second KT state. In this case, it may be configured to increase the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, since the winning frequency of the game medium is low when controlled in a special state, it is possible to create a continuous feeling of the counting display by slowing down the updating speed of the updating display of the counting display. it can.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention, the counting display executing means can continuously execute the update display of the counting display when it is controlled to the special state again after being controlled to the special state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 54, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, all prizes are awarded in the third prize ball increase production. If the update of the number of balls is not completed, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the fluctuation display after the end of the small hit game and the next small hit game will continue to perform the third prize ball increase effect. It may be configured to be possible). According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a continuous feeling of the count display by making it possible to continuously execute the update display of the count display.

Further, as the game machine of the means 6 of the second invention, an approach advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantage state (for example, an inaccessible state) in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter A variable starting device that can be changed to a closed state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) and a special variable device (for example, a special variable device that is provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and can be changed into an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state). Steps S350 to S354 are executed in the special variable winning ball device 22) and the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of executing the variable display based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device. As a result, the second starting winning opening 14 of the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a portion that executes variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball), and the state control means has a variable display. Based on the display result being a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol), it is possible to control the special variable device to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state (for example, a game). The control microcomputer 560 may be configured to perform steps S358 to S360). According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention, a specific variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state is provided, and the state control means has a variable display. Based on the display result being a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), it is possible to control the specific variable device to a specific state (for example, a jackpot game state) that changes the specific variable device to an approach advantageous state (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 560 executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357), and the counting display executing means means that the game medium has entered the specific variable device and that the game medium has entered the special variable device as a predetermined opportunity. Based on this, the count display can be updated and displayed, and the count display is updated and displayed at different update speeds depending on whether the game medium enters the specific variable device or the special variable device (for example, a big hit). When the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern in the game state, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening. In the case of displaying the prize ball number display 305 in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) is based on the fact that the special winning opening 24 has been won. It may be configured to increase the number of prize balls by 1). According to such a configuration, the mode of the update display of the count display is changed depending on which variable device the game medium has entered, thereby improving the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed. be able to.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 8 of the second invention, the counting display executing means has different update speeds depending on whether the counting display is updated and displayed according to the first pattern and the counting display is updated and displayed according to the second pattern. The count display is updated and displayed (for example, when the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second), and the second KT pattern is displayed. When the prize ball number display 305 is displayed, the number of prize balls may be increased by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, by making the update speed of the update display of the count display different according to the pattern of updating the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed. ..

Further, as the game machine of the means 9 of the second invention, the game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (for example, the right side of the game area 7) among the flow paths in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. Specific areas (for example, the operating gate 17) and special state control means (for example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. After the part to be executed) and the predetermined condition (for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, the specific state has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the special state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area. Based on the fact that the controllable specific state control means (for example, the portion where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the special conditions are satisfied. A special state control means (for example, for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased as compared with before the special condition is satisfied. Steps S2208A, S2211A, S2212A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the microcomputer 560) and a predetermined promotion notification (for example, a predetermined promotion notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. , The first instruction notification) is executed, and after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification, the specific promotion notification (for example, the second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium into the specific area is executed. ) May be provided (for example, in the second embodiment, a portion for executing steps S4404, S4405, S4604, S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the specific state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) by performing variable display and is a gaming medium (for example, a game). The first general winning opening (first general winning opening 161), which is a general winning opening to which a predetermined number (for example, five balls) of game media are given (paid out) based on the winning of the ball), and the first general winning opening. A second general winning opening (second general winning opening 162 or a third general winning opening 163) provided in a different route from the above, and a route in which the first general winning opening is provided in the advantageous state (for example, A promotion effect (for example, an effect of displaying a right-handed instruction image on the effect display device 9) for prompting the game medium to be launched toward the right-handed path) and a specific notification effect for notifying that the game medium has won a prize (for example, an effect of displaying a right-handed instruction image on the effect display device 9). For example, the effect control means is provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 200) capable of executing an effect of increasing the number of prize balls and an effect of outputting a winning sound, which increases the display of the number of prize balls. When a prize is generated at the first general winning opening in the advantageous state, the specific notification effect (winning at the first general winning opening 161 when in the big hit game state or the small hit game state) When the above occurs, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls and the effect of outputting the winning sound corresponding to the winning of the first general winning opening 161) are executed, but when the advantageous state is reached, the second general winning opening is used. When a prize is generated, the specific notification effect is not executed (a prize is generated at the second general prize opening 162 or the third general prize opening 163 when the right-handed instruction image is displayed in an advantageous state. In this case, the prize ball number increase effect is not executed by not executing the addition to the prize ball number counter, and the prize sound corresponding to the prize of the second general prize opening 162 or the prize of the third general prize opening 163 is supported. A variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 9015 or a special variable) that can change between a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win (the part that does not output the winning sound). The winning ball device 9022) and the special state control means (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. , The portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 that executes steps S90358 to S90360) and the special state (for example, the KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state. ) The variable winning means is provided with possible special state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S902208A, S902221A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560), and the variable winning means is in the special state. A game medium launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball and a small hit. (Realized by setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the game to 0.8 seconds), the variable display period is the first variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state. A first variable display pattern that is a period (for example, second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation) and a second variable display pattern that is a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period (for example,). The ratio that can be executed by the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) including the continuous effect and is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern in the special state is After the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern, the rate is lower than the ratio controlled by the special state (for example, in the case of a small hit, the second variable pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is determined. Is low (or undecided). (See FIG. 74) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the occurrence of a prize at the second general winning opening when the promotion effect is executed in an advantageous state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

Further, the specific notification effect may be associated with a variable display pattern or a special state. For example, if a prize is generated in the first general winning opening when the fluctuation based on the first variable display pattern is controlled to a special state, a specific notification effect is executed, and the fluctuation based on the second variable display pattern is changed to the special state. Even if a prize is generated in the first general prize opening when controlled, the specific notification effect may not be executed. By doing so, the player will pay more attention to the variable display pattern. Further, when controlled to a special state, it is possible to pay attention to the winning of both the variable winning means and the first general winning opening, and the interest is improved.

If the game medium is launched after being notified that it is controlled to a special state, the variable winning means will not be won, but the first general winning opening may be won, so even if the game medium is launched, it must be done. Since the player does not lose, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest.

The promotion effect is executed not only in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) but also in a special state (for example, a small hit game state) and a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)). It may be done. In addition, if the specific notification effect is not performed even if a prize is generated at the second general winning opening in an advantageous state, the addition itself is not performed on the prize ball number display 305 (winning at the second general winning opening). Even if there is, it may not be added to the prize ball number display 305), or it will be added to the prize ball number display 305, but the effect of increasing by 1 will not be performed (if there is a prize in the second general winning opening) It is added to the prize ball number display 305, but at that time, the effect of increasing by 1 is not performed). When it is not added to the prize ball number display 305, the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls due to the accidental winning can be grasped in an advantageous state or the like. Further, when the number of prize balls is added to the display of the number of prize balls 305, the number of prize balls actually generated can be grasped in an advantageous state or the like. If there is a prize in the second general winning opening in an advantageous state or the like, it may be possible to switch whether or not to add to the prize ball number display 305 depending on the setting.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve the interest and enhance the effect of production, it is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) by performing variable display. Variable winning means (for example, variable winning ball device 9015 or special variable winning ball device 9022) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult, and an advantageous state Are different states, and steps S90358 to the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. A special state control means (for example, a part that executes S90360) and a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, a second KT state)) that can be controlled to a special state more frequently than a normal state. The variable winning means is provided with steps S902208A, S902211A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, and S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560), and the variable winning means is notified that it is controlled to a special state. A game medium launched toward the means is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set. The variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state (realized by setting it to 0.8 seconds) is the first variable display pattern (for example, shortened variation) in which the variable display period is the first period. The second variation pattern # 25, # 27) and the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. A gaming machine that is lower than the ratio (for example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is low (or not determined). See FIG. 59). .. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 60 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 901 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape which is provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

As shown in FIG. 60, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display unit 909a) for variably displaying a decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second start condition, which is a second execution condition, are satisfied. A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014) and deriving and displaying the display result. (Hereinafter referred to as the second variable display unit 909b) and the display area (hereinafter, the background symbol display unit) in which the player can easily visually recognize the displayed contents as compared with the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b. 909c). Note that it is easy to visually recognize the displayed contents, for example, while the size of the display area is large and the displayed contents in the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 909a and second variable display unit 909b), and the background design effect unit 9c has two variable display units. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display 908b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. The first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to be variable display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is 0 to 5 numbers and non-numeric characters and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved storage (holding memory is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a. Further, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of the decorative pattern are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 909a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 909b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see it. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, respectively. Although it is configured, an indicator of another aspect may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. As an example, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b are each composed of one display, and the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. I will let you.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages, is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 9018c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes the effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a.

Above the gate 9032, a nail group 55 forming a flow path of the right-handed game ball is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the right-handed game ball meanders to the left and right. However, it is designed to flow down. Since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later.

An actuating gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 9017 is detected by the actuating gate switch 9017a.

Below the actuating gate 9017, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022 forming a special winning opening 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 are provided. As shown in FIG. 60, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, these special variable winning ball devices 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 9024 and the second starting winning opening 9014 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 9024, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 9014, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 60, the variable winning ball device 9015 The special variable winning ball device 9022 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 9022. Further, as shown in FIG. 60, since the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 907 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 9015. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is moved backward and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 and falls toward the out opening 9026 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side, but the special variable winning ball device 9022 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 is used for a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 9022, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 64) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 9024 is provided in the special winning opening 9024. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 opened in the special variable winning ball device 9022, another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening 9013a or the second starting winning opening 9013b. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 9024 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 9024 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second starting opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operating gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second starting winning opening 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 and launches (so-called right). Hitting operation) is performed. Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, for example, the effect display device 909 displays "right-handed" or the like or moves to the right. It is desirable to configure so as to notify that the right-handed operation period is in progress by displaying an arrow indicating.

Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 9025 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 907. Top frame lamps 9028a, left frame lamps 9028b, and right frame lamps 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 907. Further, a prize ball lamp 9051 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball burnout lamp 9052 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 9028c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 905 and launches the game ball into the game area 907 using the rotational force of the drive motor (not shown). ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 905, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 908a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 909a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second special symbol display unit 908b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second variable display unit 909b starts the second decorative symbol. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or after a certain period of time has passed since the special variable winning ball device 9020 was opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 6-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 908a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 908b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the small hit game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player, although the advantage is lower than that of the big hit game state (in this example, the number of balls that can be obtained is small). The game state does not transition to another game state before and after the game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is made a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and then when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly completed when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state is shown, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 907. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the 1st KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 909c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 909c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, at the time of reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 909c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 909c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 61 to 63 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the variable winning is achieved. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

As shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 90101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 9022 is fixedly supported in the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, a special winning opening 9024 (second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball device 9015) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 9024, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 90102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom member 9023 on the back surface side (rear) of the game area 907 when the bottom member 9023 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 9024 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 90101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 9023 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom member 9023 is movable back and forth between the forward-moved state shown in FIG. 62 and the backward-moved state shown in FIG. 63, and the bottom member 9023 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 61 to 63, a flow path forming base 90112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 90101, and the flow path forming base 90112 is moved forward. The upstream region 9023U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 9023, and the upstream channel 90113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 9023. A downstream region 9023L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 9023, and a downstream flow path portion 90114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 9023, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base 90112 is recessed downward from the end of the upstream flow path 90113 and the downstream flow path 90114 on the bottom surface member 9023 side, and the special winning openings 9024 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 90115 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 9023 from below to guide the game ball that has fallen below the bottom member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024.

The upstream side flow path portion 90113 and the downstream side flow path portion 90114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so as to allow the game ball to flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 90115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 9024 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 9024. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 9024 side (back side of the game area 907) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 90112. Has been done. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow path portions bounces toward the glass door frame 904 side. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 9022, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, consisting of an upstream side flow path portion 90113, a bottom surface member 9023, and a downstream side flow path portion 90114, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 90118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 90117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 90118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 90118 are formed so as to be lined up at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 9023, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 90117. One regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion that covers the 90114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023, a total of five regulation pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 90118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 62, the special variable winning ball device 9022 (and the variable winning ball device 9015 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P moves to the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014). It basically passes through the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 63, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom surface member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014).

FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 64 also shows the payout control board 9037, the effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. The input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 to control the game of the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020, the solenoid 90106 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the solenoid 90206 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 90560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031. The main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 65, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including a effect control CPU 90201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates according to a program stored in the internal or external ROM (not shown), and the capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( The effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 65 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. 64. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the input / output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 via the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. It also supplies the decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 9024a.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP90209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 90209 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP90209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90200, and VRAM is mapped therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1 It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 9070 and the lamp shown in FIG. 65). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 that controls the effect display device 909. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S904). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S901 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether the backup RAM area data protection processing (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as adding parity data) was performed when the power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). Note that the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table set in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 in the pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S9014). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S901 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 67. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for saving the necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S9021).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b. Execute (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024, S9025).

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1': Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2': Determines which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5': Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7': Determine the initial value of random 1'(for determining the initial value of random 1')
(6) Random 8': Determine the initial value of random 6'(for determining the initial value of random 6')

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 67, the game control microcomputer 90560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random 2') is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. There may be.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol process process (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs the hold storage process (step S9027a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a, the CPU 9056 issues a payout control command for specifying one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs the detection signal from the first count switch 9023a or the second count switch 9025a, the CPU 9056 outputs a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. To do.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 9024 and is detected by the second count switch 9025a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect described later are not immediately executed but are executed later. However, regarding the payout of prize balls, in the prize ball processing in step S9030, when the detection signal from the second count switch 9025a is input, the payout control for immediately designating 15 prize balls. A command is output, the ball payout device 9097 is driven by the payout control microcomputer, and 15 prize balls are immediately paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 sets the content related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, but the CPU 9056 uses the CPU 9056. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 69A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1'is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 69 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value shown in the right column of FIG. 69 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 69 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 69B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 69 (B) is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 69 (B) is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S90162B) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, and the small hit may be obtained. As described above, in the KT state, since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the big hit game state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1'). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 69 (A). If any of the indicated jackpot judgment values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for determining the big hit matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 69 (B), it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 69 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 69 (B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether or not to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 69 (B) is performed, and the lottery process is performed to be approximately 1/4. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 2') for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "2R probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a 20% probability, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, it shifts to the second KT state. See steps S902207A, S902208A, S902207B, and S902210B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not in the second KT state even if it becomes "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state shifts to the first KT state. See steps S902210A, S902221A, S902212B, and S902213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902213A and S902010-S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S902212B and S902213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902215B and S902010 to S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

71 to 73 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 29 types of # 01 to # 29 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 29) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 71 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the KT shown in FIG. 71 (B) is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 71 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 72 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 72 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By making it, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize ball is targeted by a small hit even in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special prize opening 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 72 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 72 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 72 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. To. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 9022 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 72 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 72 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 11 Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation is applied. May be decided. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. In this embodiment, it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are misses or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 or the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In this case, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 909, a symbol fanning effect such as a reach effect or a sliding effect is executed.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 72 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 72 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. 72 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 12 or the second fluctuation pattern # 13 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at least a plurality of small hits can be generated is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 73 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 73 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the short shortening fluctuation. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 19 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is included. 18 may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 73 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 73 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, one of the second fluctuation patterns # 20 to # 24 is used. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the range after the 2nd fluctuation in the high probability / 1st KT state. May be determined as the second fluctuation pattern # 20 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. Further, even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), when a big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 24 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), even when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, the second fluctuation pattern # 21 and the second fluctuation pattern including the battle effect are included. # 23 may be determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 73 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 73 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 29.

As shown in FIG. 73 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation of the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed, may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, a second fluctuation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues is included. It may be decided to be # 26. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. Pattern # 28 may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 29 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the variation pattern of the shortened variation of the second variation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it differs depending on the number of reserved storages. It may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation by the ratio. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be determined at a higher rate as the number of reserved memories increases, so that the reserved memories are digested earlier and the operating rate may be increased.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in the low probability state and execute a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the high probability state.

Next, a specific example of the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation patterns of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol [high probability / at the time of the second KT] shown in FIG. 73 (I). In the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol [high probability / at the time of the second KT] shown in FIG. 73 (I), a judgment value is assigned for each fluctuation pattern, but in the example shown in FIG. 74, it is assigned. The ratio of the judgment values (that is, the determination ratio for each fluctuation pattern) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 74, in this embodiment, when the probability is determined to be out of the range in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation is determined at a rate of 70%, and the rate is 30%. The second variation pattern # 26 including the continuous effect is determined in. In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 of the shortened variation is determined at a rate of 95%, and the second variation pattern # including the continuous effect is determined at a rate of 5%. 28 is determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol whose display result is not a big hit is displayed as the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, It can be executed by # 27) and a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28).

In the KT state, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation during that time. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, but the game ball is launched due to the provision of the nail group 55. It is configured to take at least 1.0 second from the to the special variable winning ball device 9022. That is, even if the game ball is fired after the small hit occurs (specifically, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed or after the occurrence of the small hit is notified), the special winning opening 9024 is won. It is configured so that it cannot be forced. Then, even if a small hit occurs after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won, and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced. There is a risk of causing it.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the fluctuation is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # 28) having a relatively long fluctuation time. The rate at which small hits occur after the execution of is lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the variation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuations (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). Judgment value is assigned to. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is determined at a rate of 5%. However, it may not be decided. That is, in the KT state (here, the second KT state) by not providing the second fluctuation pattern # 28 or assigning the determination value to the second fluctuation pattern # 28, the fluctuation time varies depending on the fluctuation pattern. The small hit may not occur even after the display is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, # 27), the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # including the continuous effect are included. 28 is provided, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an effect other than the continuous effect (for example, when the display result is off, when the small hit, and when the big hit is common is common. A variation pattern including (such as the reach effect to be executed) may be provided.

For example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than the shortened fluctuation, which is a variation pattern that is out of alignment after the predetermined reach effect is executed, and a variation pattern in which a small hit is obtained after the predetermined reach effect is executed. A fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit after the predetermined reach effect is executed may be provided. Also in this case, the rate at which a small hit occurs after the variation display is executed by the variation pattern in which the predetermined reach effect is executed depends on the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27). It is desirable that the judgment value is assigned so as to be lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the fluctuation display is executed. In addition, if a big hit is not achieved after the predetermined reach effect is executed, it is desirable that the rate of loss is higher than that of a small hit.

In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, one of three or more fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times can be selected, and the ratio of selecting from the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is increased. You may. For example, when the display result is off, when it is a small hit, and when it is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) and a fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20), respectively. A fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) is provided when a fluctuation pattern (variation time 30 seconds) including the second reach effect is provided and a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state. > The selection ratio may be increased in the order of the variation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds). Further, the fluctuation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) are displayed in this order. If the result is not a big hit, the percentage of misses may be higher than that of a small hit. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the rate at which small hits occur is low (or does not occur) after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time. Even in the first KT state, the rate of small hits occurring after the variation display is executed by the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time may be low (or not generated).

Further, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds. Even if the game ball is fired after a hit has occurred (specifically, after the small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of a small hit has been notified), the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won. However, it may be realized by only one of the configurations, and even if the nail group 55 is not provided, a predetermined period (for example, for example) before the game ball arrives at the special winning opening 9024. It may be realized by arranging it at a position that takes 1.0 second or more, which is longer than the opening period.

In addition, when the player is in the KT state, a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 907 (for example, the character display of "right-handed" on the effect display device 909) When it is configured to display an arrow display indicating the right direction, etc.), when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27), and when the variation display is executed. Right-handed notification may be executed in a different manner from when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) having a relatively long variation time. For example, in the KT state, when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28), the rate of small hits is low and the right-handed operation is performed. Since it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player even if it is stopped, it is "right-handed" than when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). The character display and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed stroke. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable right-handed notification according to the situation.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 75 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 75 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9022 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (1). As shown in FIG. 75 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be off, the outlier symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 75 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 75 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 75 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 75 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (2). As shown in FIG. 75 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be off, the outlier symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 75 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 75 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 75 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022 of the above, and it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024. For example, in this embodiment, the winning frequency of the game balls is low as compared with the case where a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round in the big hit game state, but during one small hit game in the second KT state. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the game balls to the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 with respect to the number of game balls fired in the game area 907.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056). This is done by executing (see step S9026C). In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) Determines whether or not to hit the normal map. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be made different by making it different. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 9015 in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 75 (1) is provided. A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 9015 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 75 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 9015 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 9015, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 9015 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later. And, as shown in FIG. 75, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 9015 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 9032 The variable winning ball device 9015 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special winning opening 9024 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by providing the nail group 55 and shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the game ball is variable after passing through the gate 9032 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 9015. Since the winning ball device 9015 is set to start opening, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

In this embodiment, in order to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, the nail group 55 is provided and the variation of the normal symbol is provided. Although the time is set as short as 0.2 seconds, the capture element may be eliminated by only one of the configurations. Further, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the capture element may be eliminated by the position, shape, and opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning opening 9024. For example, the special winning opening 9024 is such that the period until the game ball launched after the small hit occurs reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special winning opening 9024 is longer than the opening period of the special winning opening 9024 by the small hit. The position, shape, and opening pattern of the above may be defined.

76 and 77 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. In the example shown in FIG. 76, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H) are the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) that specifies that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a winning determination result) indicating the content of the winning determination result. The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained, whether or not a small hit is obtained, and a judgment result of the type of the big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning.

In this embodiment, in the winning determination process (see FIG. 79) described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of big hit at the time of starting winning. To judge. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted. For example, in the winning determination process described later, when it is determined that the result is "missing", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "16R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 7 designation command) in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, in the winning determination process, it is determined which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern falls within, and the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern) is obtained. You may send the command shown. With this configuration, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the fluctuation pattern.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 9013 (step S90311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S90300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S90303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S90304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process (step S9036) based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S90304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. Control is performed to transmit a round display effect control command during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, and processing is performed to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S90307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S90212). If the first reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S90213), and the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S90214). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 80) (step S90215). .. In the process of step S90215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1'), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2'), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5') are extracted and stored in the storage area. It is stored. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5') is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may try to do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly extracts a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') in the first variation pattern setting process described later. It may be.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 80, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are filled with a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1'), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2'), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5'). ) Is memorized. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning determination process (step S90216), and controls transmission of a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S90217). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, the jackpot type is determined as to whether or not to make a jackpot or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later. At the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the winning judgment process is executed in advance to make a big hit. Check whether it will be a small hit and the type of big hit. By doing so, the display result can be predicted before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result at the time of winning. ..

In the winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random 1') with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 69 (A), and determines whether or not they match. Confirm. If they do not match, if the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random 1') with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation shown in the right column of FIG. 69 (A), and they are compared. Check if they match. It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90216 and whether or not the variable display is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state has changed before the fluctuation display based on the start prize is actually started (for example, if a probability change jackpot or a sudden probability change jackpot occurs before the start of fluctuation, the probability change state is changed from the normal state. It may have changed to.) Therefore, the gaming state at the start winning and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the start winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S90216).

In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S90216 to S90218 are executed and a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning determination process is executed, the symbol designation command and the first valid A set of two commands of the start prize designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300, it means that the first special symbol display 908a does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S9050A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send a background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S9063A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S9068A without performing the processing after step S9064A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065A. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S9063A, steps S9064A to S90161A. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1') from the first random number storage buffer (step S9064A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064A). Step S9065A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066A), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S9067A). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot (step S90160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S90161A), and the process proceeds to step S9068A. To do. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S9066A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S9068A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S9068A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S9068A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068A is determined.

In step S9065A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S90302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (B) according to the game state. (Step S90201). Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S90201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 71 should be used (step S901700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S901700, the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and changes. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S901702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is started (step S901703). Then, the game control microcomputer 90560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S901706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S90302), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, and based on the decision result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 90200.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S901121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S901122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control to send the designated command (step S901123A). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (step S901125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the CPU 9056 moves to step S901123A and controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S90304) (step S901124A).

By executing the process of step S901125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. It is stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 90200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 909a in the first variable display unit 909a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S90302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 78 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S90312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S90322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, It is configured to store a new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (N in step S901125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state is "0" (step S902010), and in "0". If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 9056 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S902011), and whether or not the value becomes "0". (Step S902012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 9056 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state ( Step S902013) and step S902014. As a result, when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state).

In step S902014, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S902014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S902015).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S902017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S902018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S902019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S902020).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 9017a has been input (step S902501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input, the CPU 9056 transmits the first jackpot start designation command (step S902502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first jackpot opening preprocessing. Set to the corresponding value (step S902503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 9017. The game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S902204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S902201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S902202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S902203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S902204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204A). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205A), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207A), and at the same time, the second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S902209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S902210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S902211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902212A). Further, the CPU 9056 sets "100" in the KT count counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S902213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S902214A).

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 9014 (step S90321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 79 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is set to be off (including the case where it is forced to be off)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S90350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the second large winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. Control is performed to transmit a round display effect control command during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, and processing is performed to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S90357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S90358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 9022 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S90359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 75). Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the second count switch 9025a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S90360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example).

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350, it means that the second special symbol display 908b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S9050B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051B). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S9060A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S9063B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S9068B without performing the processing after step S9064B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065B. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S9063B, steps S9064B to S90161B. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1') from the second random number storage buffer (step S9064B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064B). Step S9065B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S9067B). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step S90160B), and the jackpot type is stored (step S90161B). The process proceeds to step S9068B.

If the big hit is not made in step S9066B, the game control microcomputer 90560 executes the small hit determination module (step S90162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (which may be a small hit determination random number) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S90163B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S90164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9068B.

Then, in step S9068B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S9068B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068B is determined.

In step S9065B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S90351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S90301) shown in FIG. 82. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 82, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the type determination result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command to display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command to display result 7 specified command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Controls transmission.

The second special symbol changing process (step S90353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) shown in FIG. 83. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 83, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S90354), substantially the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) shown in FIG. 84 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 84, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is generally explained. However, in the second special symbol stop processing, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step S90358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A) is the same as the first gate passing waiting process (step S90304A) shown in FIG. 85. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 85, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S90357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S902204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S902201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S902202B). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set with a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) (step S902203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S902204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204B). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205B), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206B). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207B). Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S902208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S902208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the start of the jackpot, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S902209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

By executing the processes of steps S902208B to S902210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the transition to the second KT state is made only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S902211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S902212B). Step S902213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902214B). Further, the CPU 9056 sets "100" in the KT count counter (step S902215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) (step S902216B).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S90701). After that, the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. .. In addition, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). In addition, a prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed (step S90707). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90708). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S90709). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702.

91 to 93 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S90618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90201 receives the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S90622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S90622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S90624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S90626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S90630), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S90631). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S90632). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the prize ball count counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S90633), and displays the effect. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 909, control is performed to erase the prize ball number display (step S90634).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S90635), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S90636). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first KT state flag (step S90637). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S90638). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90639). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the first KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S90640), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S90641). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S90642). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S90643). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90644). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the first KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S90645), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S90646). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S90647). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S90648). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the second KT pattern (step S90649). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the second KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the first KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S90639, S9064, S90649 and the processing of step S90979 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing described later are executed, so that the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed. The number of prize balls is displayed during the state), but by executing the process of steps S9063 and S90634, the value of the prize ball counter when the KT state is ended and the low probability / non-KT state is returned. Is reset (cleared to 0) and the display of the number of prize balls ends.

Further, in this embodiment, the process of steps S90639 and S90644 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the first KT pattern in the first KT state, and the process of step S90649 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the second KT state. Although the case where the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the first KT state, the prize ball number display may not be displayed (the processing of steps S90639 and S90644 is unnecessary).

If the received production control command is a large winning opening prize designation command (step S90650), the production control CPU 90201 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the large winning opening (step S90650). Along with step S90651), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 9024. Along with (step S90654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 9024) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90655).

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball wins in the large winning opening and when the game ball wins in the special winning opening 9024 is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large prize opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 9024. You may.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display designation command (step S90660), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the customer waiting demonstration display (step S90661). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the previous small hit flag indicating that the display result of the previous fluctuation display was a small hit is reset (step S90662), and the small hits are continuously generated. The small hit continuous number counter indicating the number of hits is cleared to 0 (step S90663).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the continuous small hit effect can be executed when the small hits occur continuously, but the process of steps S90662 and S90663 is executed. Therefore, if the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after the variable display that is a small hit is executed, the continuous small hit is displayed even if the variable display executed after that is a small hit. The production is configured so that it is not executed.

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step S90664), the effect control CPU 90201 sends the received symbol specification command to the first free start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area of (step S90665).

If the received effect control command is the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command (step S90666), the effect control CPU 90101 receives the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90667).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S90670). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S90706) shown in FIG. 90. In the background symbol process process, the effect control CPU 90201 first executes the hold sequence effect control process that controls the hold sequence effect (step 90900A). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs any of the processes of steps S90900 to S90908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 909c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S90901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S90901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902).

Background symbol change processing (step S90902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S90903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 90201 may extend the variation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S90903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900), the big hit display process (step S90904), or the small hit medium process (step S90908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904), the jackpot display process (step S90904) is performed on the condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S90908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S90904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S90905).

Processing during the round (step S90905): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S90906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening indicating that the large winning opening is open (closed) is received, interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S90907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

Small hit middle processing (step S90908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the hold continuous effect control process (step S90900A). In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the hold memories currently stored, that is, a hold sequence that suggests that the jackpot is continuously executed. The production can be performed.

In the hold continuous effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the command indicating the jackpot is included in the set) of the start prize designation command) (step S903502).

When a command indicating a jackpot is included (Y in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903502a). In step S903502a, for example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous jackpot confirmation" is displayed, so that there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the currently stored hold memories, and the jackpot is continuous. Is notified that it will be executed.

In this embodiment, when there is a hold memory that is a big hit in the first hold memory related to the variable display of the first special symbol currently stored, or the second hold regarding the variable display of the second special symbol. When there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit in the memory, it is configured to be able to notify that the big hit is continuously executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the second hold memory. It is possible to notify that the jackpot is continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, and if there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot in the first hold memory, the jackpot continues. It may be configured not to notify that it is executed. Further, it may be possible to notify that the jackpots are continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a specific jackpot (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903503), and ends the process.

If it is not the start timing of the big hit game (N in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the timing during the big hit game (step S903504). In step S903504, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is either in-round processing (step S90905) or post-round processing (step S90906), it is determined that the timing is during the jackpot game.

If the timing is during the jackpot game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903505), and if it is not set, the process ends. If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not a new round has been started in the jackpot game (step S903506). For example, it can be confirmed by comparing the content of the received large winning opening opening display command with the content of the previously received large winning opening opening display command. When a new round is started, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the total land number counter that counts the total number of rounds during the hold continuous production, and displays the effect based on the value of the total land number counter. The device 909 controls to display the number of rounds (steps S903507 and S903508). After that, the process ends.

If it is not the timing during the big hit game (N in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the big hit game (step S903509). In step S903509, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot end effect processing (step S903907), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the end timing of the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903510), and if it is set, the process ends as it is. .. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies the game state after the big hit game (step S903511). In step S903511, for example, when the probabilistic state is controlled after the big hit game, the effect display device 909 displays the character display of "probability change rush", and when the effect is controlled to the KT state, the effect display device 909 In, the character display of "small hit time rush" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the game state after the big hit game is notified at the end timing of the big hit game. For example, at the start timing and the executing timing of the big hit game, the characters "with second KT" may be displayed. Notification may be performed by displaying the character display of "No second KT". Further, also in this case, the notification may not be performed when the hold continuous effect is executed, and the notification may be performed only when the hold continuous effect is not executed.

If the command indicating the jackpot is not included (N in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 is reset if the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903512), and the value of the total number of rounds counter is also reset. (Step S903513).

As shown in FIG. 95, in this embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed by the process of steps S903502 to S903503, at the start of the previous big hit game, the effect display device 909 determines the "continuous big hit". By displaying the character display, it is notified that the jackpot is continuously executed. Further, by the processing of steps S903504 to S903508, the total number of rounds of the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game is shown during the execution of the hold continuous production, and a series of big hit games are executed. You can make it look like it is being done.

Further, by the processing of steps S903509 to S903511, when the hold continuous effect is not being executed, the game state (for example, the probability change state or the KT state) controlled after the end of the jackpot game is notified, but the hold continuous effect is executed. When it is inside, those notifications are not performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game ends and the normal game starts, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. ..

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the hold continuous production is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if a small hit occurs, the execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game is completed and the normal game is being performed, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. it can.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S90901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S90920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols do not match completely match. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the same combination as the reach-out symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a small hit (step S90921a). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a small hit is determined by, for example, the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step S90618) indicating the small hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not (whether or not the display result 7 designated command is stored).

If the variation display started this time is a small hit (Y in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S90921b), and is set. For example, the process table for holding continuous time according to the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol to be used is selected according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (step S90921c). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932. The process table for hold continuous time selected in step S90921c is configured so that the effect related to the small hit is not executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit (for example, the small hit notification, the continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. In this embodiment, the execution of the effect related to the small hit is prohibited during the execution of the hold continuous effect, but for example, it is inconspicuous (for example, the display size is small and the color is small). It may be restricted by executing it in a form (thin, etc.).

If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90922). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90931. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit flag was set last time (step S90923). If the small hit flag was not set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time was not a small hit), the effect control CPU 90201 indicates that small hits have occurred continuously. As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect to be notified, the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit is selected (step S90924). On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is a small hit and small hits occur continuously), the effect control CPU 90201 As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect, a continuous small hit effect determination table corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits is selected ( Step S90925).

In this embodiment, the process of step S90922 is executed so that the continuous small hit effect can be executed only in the second KT state, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the continuous small hit effect may be configured to be executable in both the first KT state and the second KT state.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in steps S90924 and S90925, and determines the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect (step S90926).

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 97A shows a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit selected in step S90924. Further, FIG. 97B shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 1 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 2 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for two consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 97C shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 2 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 3 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for three consecutive small hits) selected for (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 97 (D) shows the case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 3 or more in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, continuously in the fluctuation display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for a number of consecutive small hits of 4 times or more) selected for (when small hits occur 4 times or more) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the continuous small hit effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect A, the continuous small hit effect B, and the continuous small hit effect C. There is. In this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect A is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character A appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character A. .. Further, the continuous small hit effect B is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character B appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character B. Further, the continuous small hit effect C is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character C appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character C.

In this embodiment, the case where the type of the character is different depending on the type of the continuous small hit effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the type of character display may be different or the display color of character display may be different depending on the type of continuous small hit effect. Further, as the continuous small hit effect, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 9025 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be executed, or the effect of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 9027 may be executed, and various as the continuous small hit effect. It is possible to produce various aspects.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which three types of continuous small hit effects A to C can be executed, but not limited to such a mode, four or more types of continuous small hit effects are continuously small. The hit effect may be configured to be executable, or only two types of continuous small hit effects may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that there is only one type of continuous small hit effect.

As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the previous fluctuation display was not a small hit (that is, when continuous small hits did not occur), there was no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 100%. It is determined. In this embodiment, if the previous variation display is not a small hit, the continuous small hit effect is not executed. Therefore, when it is determined to be N in step S90923, it is as it is. It may be configured to move to step S90931. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), when small hits occur twice in succession in this fluctuation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect B and the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low ratio.

Further, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), when small hits occur three times in a row in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without continuous small hits, and at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, and it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 50%. That is, the continuous small hit effect B is executed at a relatively high rate. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), when small hits occur four or more times in succession in the current fluctuation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and a rate of 10%. Is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 20%, and is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect C at a rate of 50%. .. That is, the continuous small hit effect C is executed at a relatively high rate.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect A already being executed in the second continuous small hit fluctuation is high, FIGS. 97 (C) and 97 (D) As shown in the above, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect A is set to be low in the small hit fluctuation of the third and subsequent times in a row. Further, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect B already being executed in the third consecutive small hit fluctuation is high, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the fourth or more consecutive small hit effects In the small hit fluctuation, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect B is set to be low. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it becomes difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the allocation of the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIG. 97 makes it difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the continuous small hit effect A is executed, a flag indicating that the continuous small hit effect A has been executed is set, and when the continuous small hit effect is continuously displayed, the flag is set. If the flag is set, a type of continuous small hit effect other than the continuous small hit effect A may be configured to be executable.

Further, in this embodiment, when the previous variation display is a small hit (when small hits occur continuously), the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (D) is used. Although the case is shown in which the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined by executing the lottery process, the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, when the previous variation display is a small hit, the continuous small hit effect may be unconditionally executed without performing the lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, a case is shown in which the type of the continuous small hit effect to be executed from the plurality of types of continuous small hit effects A to C is determined by the lottery process. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the type of continuous small hit effect may be fixedly determined according to the number of consecutive small hits. For example, if it is the second small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect A is fixedly determined, if it is the third small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect B is fixedly determined, and the small hits of the fourth or more consecutive times are determined. If it is a hit, the continuous small hit effect C may be fixedly determined.

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect (Y in step S90927), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the variation pattern and determination of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table corresponding to the type of continuous small hit effect is selected (step S90928). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932.

In this embodiment, the process table selected in step S90928 is used to execute the processes of step S90933, which will be described later, and step S90944 of the background symbol variation processing, so that the effect display device 909 continuously displays the background symbol variation. A small hit effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when a small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol during the second KT state, the rate of the variation display of the shortened variation is increased (this book). In the example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (I) and 74, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortening fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%) is shortened. A fluctuation display other than the fluctuation may be performed (in this example, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined). Therefore, for example, in the background symbol fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 96, when the fluctuation display this time is a small hit fluctuation, it is further determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation of the shortened fluctuation. By executing the processing of steps S90922 to S90928 to enable the continuous small hit effect only when it is a pattern, when the continuous small hit effect is executed, it is always executed in the variation display of the shortened fluctuation. It is configured as follows.

Unless the fluctuation display started this time is a small hit (N in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag (step S90929) if it is set, and the number of consecutive small hits. The value of the counter is cleared to 0 (step S90930).

After clearing the small hit continuous number counter in step S90930, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step S90922), or if it is decided not to execute the continuous small hit effect (N in step S90927). The effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S90931). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S90932). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S90933). For example, the background symbol display unit 909c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 90209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 26, # 28, # 29), step S90933 and the background described later are described according to the process table selected in steps S90928 and S90931. By executing the process of step S90944 of the process during the change of the symbol, the continuous effect is executed during the change display of the background symbol. Further, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 16, # 18, # 19, # 21, # 23, # 24, # 29), steps S90928 and S90931 By executing the processes of step S90933 and step S90944 of the background symbol changing process described later according to the process table selected in the above, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol variation display.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S90934). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902) (step S90935).

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a background symbol changing process (step S90902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S90940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S90941). When the process timer times out (step S90942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S90943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S90944).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S90950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S90950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S90950, for example, when the effect control CPU 90201 executes the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one of the special symbols that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of order is started, the background symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S90951), the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S90903) (step S90952). ).

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S90970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S90974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S90973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S90974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S90970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S90983. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S90982. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is set. The process proceeds to step S90983 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 uses the effect display device 909 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S90971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90972), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90973).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S90974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90975). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S90976). In step S90976, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. In this process table for continuous holding, for example, a big hit game that emphasizes that a new big hit game is started is not executed, a simple fanfare effect is executed, or a big hit game that replaces the fanfare effect is performed. It is configured so that an effect or the like indicating that it is restarted is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the first big hit game and the later big hit game.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90978).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern (step S90979). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control is performed to newly start the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the first KT pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern.

In this embodiment, in the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 99, the case where the prize ball number display is started or switched by the jackpot pattern (see step S90979) is shown, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, in the jackpot display process (step S90904), the first round process after starting the jackpot game (step S90905), and the like, the same process as in step S90979 is performed to start or switch the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern. It may be configured as follows.

After that, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904) (step S90980).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90982).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S90983). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90984). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S90985). In step S90985, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. The process table for the pending continuous time is configured such that, for example, the small hit medium effect is not executed, a simple small hit medium effect is executed, or an effect alternative to the small hit medium effect is executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit will be restricted.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90986), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90987).

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908) (step S90988).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S90971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S90972 and N in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S90989).

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S90908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S909201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S909202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 909, speaker 9027, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S909203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S909204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S909205). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S909206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S909207 Move to. In step S909207, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the previous small hit flag if it is not set (step S909207). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step S909208).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the variation display other than the small hit is started, the previous small hit flag is reset and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is cleared to 0 (see steps S90929 and S90930). ). Therefore, if the small hit game is executed based on the first variation display that becomes the small hit after executing the fluctuation display other than the small hit, the processing of steps S909207 and S909208 is executed, so that the previous time. The small hit flag is set and 1 is set in the small hit continuous number counter. Therefore, if the small hit occurs again in the next fluctuation display, it can be determined that the small hit has occurred twice in succession based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter being 1. Then, when the small hit continuous number counter value is updated to 2 by executing step S909208 by ending the small hit game, and the small hit is made again in the next fluctuation display, the small hit continuous Based on the value of the number counter being 2, it can be determined that small hits have occurred three times in a row. After that, even if small hits occur four times, five times, and so on, by checking the value of the small hit continuous number counter, it is possible to determine how many small hits have occurred continuously. Can be determined.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S909209).

FIGS. 101 to 104 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S90707). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S90500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening is winning), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S90501) and wins the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90502). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 uses the effect display device 909 to perform the prize ball at the first speed. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90503). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90504). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or during the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big prize opening When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 9024, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased one by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game. It is an effect that is executed in such a way as to do. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this embodiment, the fact that the big winning opening winning flag is set (a winning in the big winning opening has occurred) means that the big hit game is in progress and the number of prize balls displayed by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90503, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 90201 is set whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S90505). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the first prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90502 or step S90505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S90506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90507). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90508). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S90509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball counter. However, by executing the processing of steps S90500 to S90509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (this example). Then, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for one prize in the large prize opening. The number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is performed only up to, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls will continue to increase is displayed. We, the first prize ball increase production will continue to be executed until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By the end of the production, the number of prize balls will increase.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S90510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S90511), and holds the holding sequence. It is confirmed whether or not the execution flag is set (step S90511a). If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the hold continuous effect, the process is terminated as it is without performing the effect related to the small hit such as the prize ball increase effect or the prize effect effect. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S90513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special prize opening 9024 during the non-KT state, since the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, the process is terminated as it is without performing the prize ball increase effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S90514). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 uses the effect display device 909 to perform the prize ball at the first speed. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90515). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90516). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90515, the first KT pattern is used. In the display of the number of prize balls displayed, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the third winning ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S90517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S90518). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the second prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90514 or step S90518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S90519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90520). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90521). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S90522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and immediately. 15 is added to the prize ball counter (see step S90655), but the prize ball number display may be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S90510 to S90522. Instead, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the first KT state, 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if the next special prize opening 9024 is awarded at the stage when the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is completed. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S90512 (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect effect (step S90523). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S90524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S90525). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

If the winning effect execution flag is not set (that is, the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 909 (for example, character display such as "+15"). (Step S90526) and control to start the winning effect on the effect display device 909 (step S90527). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the winning effect executing flag (step S90528). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90529). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the effect display device 909 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90530). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S90531). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90532). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90531, the second KT pattern is used. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90517 or step S90529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S90533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S90523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the effect effect (step S90534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S90535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize balls at the second speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls (step S90537). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the second KT pattern on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90538). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030) and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball counter (see step S90655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90532, S90535 to S90359. The number of prize balls is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds × 15 = 7.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special winning opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if the next special prize opening 9024 is awarded at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is performed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls additionally generated).

Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. In some cases, the production in which the number of all prize balls increases may not be completed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the 3rd prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the 3rd prize will be displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect execution flag is set (step S90540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S90541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, when the winning effect is started in step S90527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the winning effect (step S90542).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S90543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S90544). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as "+15") (step S90545), and starts the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball. Control is performed (step S90546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S90547).

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S90524 to S90528 and S90540 to S90547 is executed and a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the second KT state, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a prize-winning effect is executed. In this case, a new prize may be generated for the next special prize opening 9024 during the execution of the prize production. In such a case, the prize is waited until the execution of the prize production is completed. After the executing prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are displayed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is completed. The prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (furthermore, the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display in between).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 9024 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 9024 is won. (See steps S90523, S90533, S90534).

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display effect (step S90707) is configured as an effect to be executed in the effect control main process, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the background symbol process process, the step The prize ball number display effect (step S90707) may be executed before the processes of S90900 to S90908 are executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display and a prize production are executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024. For example, the special prize opening lamp 9024a is further used. It may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, there is a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 9024, and the effect that the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a game machine configured to be provided with a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls is paid out without opening the variable winning ball device even if a prize is won). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is entered in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a directing effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, specific examples of the KT notification and the small hit notification in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of KT notification and small hit notification. Further, FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. In addition, in FIGS. 105 and 106, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

FIG. 105 shows a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification when the hold continuous production is not being executed. As shown in FIG. 105 (A), during the big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), when the big hit game is completed, a character display 90312 such as the line "small hit time rush" of the character 90301 is displayed as a KT notification notifying that the game is controlled to the second KT state. (See step S903511).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 105 (C) and 105 (D), when the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed, the small hit is derived. As a notification, for example, a character display 90306 such as "small hit occurs!" Is displayed. In addition, the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern is displayed.

FIG. 106 shows a specific example when the KT notification and the small hit notification are restricted while the hold continuous production is being executed. As shown in FIG. 106 (A), during the first big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), even after the big hit game is completed, the KT notification is not performed because the hold continuous production is being executed (that is, the character display 90312 such as "small hit time rush" is displayed. (See steps S903509 to S903510), character 90301 and character display 90302 continue to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display after the first big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs, the small hit notification is not performed. (That is, the character display 90306 such as "small hit occurs!" Is not displayed). At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 106 (C), the number of rounds (“Round 16” in this example) is continuously displayed from the time of the final round of the first jackpot game, and the dialogue of the character 90301 is “still more! The character display 90313 such as "" is displayed, and it seems that the jackpot game is continuing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), when the second big hit game is started, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 90301. Display 90302 is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 106 (D), the number of rounds displayed (“round 17” in this example) is displayed by adding the number of rounds of the first big hit game to the number of rounds of the second big hit game. , It seems that a series of jackpot games are being executed (see steps S903504 to S903508). Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 106, it is possible to produce an effect in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order through the previous jackpot game period, the variable display period after the jackpot game ends, and the later jackpot game period. It may be executed or a specific movie image (for example, an image of a video in which a character operates based on a specific story) may be displayed to make it appear that a series of jackpot games are being executed. ..

Next, the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification will be described. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), when the jackpot game is started, if the pending memory 4 that is the jackpot exists among the currently stored reserved memories 1 to 4, the jackpot is continuously executed. Notification of the pending ream is performed to notify that. In this case, after the jackpot game is completed, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed. Further, even if a small hit occurs based on the holds 1 to 3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification is not performed. At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted.

When it is notified that a big hit occurs multiple times in a short period of time by the hold continuous production, at the same time, it is also notified that the period controlled to the KT state (particularly the second KT state) after the big hit game is short. There is a risk of degrading the interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, when notifying that the big hits are continuously executed by the hold continuous production, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed after the end of the big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs. By restricting the small hit notification (and the display related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect), it makes the player feel that a series of big hit games are being executed. , It is prevented that the holding rendition will rather reduce the interest.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of the first big hit or the second big hit, when the big hit game is started, if there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, the hold continuous production can be executed. For example, the jackpot type of the later jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot not controlled by the second KT state, the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R normal jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot of the previous jackpot. If either of the types is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled by the second KT state), or if both are applicable, it is notified that the second KT state is a short period of time. Therefore, the execution of the hold continuous effect may be restricted (for example, prohibited or the execution frequency may be reduced). Further, for example, when the configuration is such that the KT state (or the second KT state) is always controlled after the big hit game, the hold continuous effect may be executed.

Further, the situation in which the hold continuous effect can be executed is limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal that is not controlled to the second KT state). When the jackpot is 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot and 6R probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous effect is executed. It may be possible. In this case, after the end of the previous jackpot game, it is not controlled to the second KT state, and it is desirable that the next jackpot occurs earlier. Therefore, the holding continuous production does not rather reduce the interest. .. Therefore, along with the big hit game, it may be notified that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game this time. In the example shown in FIG. 107 (B), the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), but regardless of the jackpot type of the later jackpot. If the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state, a 2R probability variation jackpot, a 6R normal jackpot, and a 6R probability variation jackpot), the hold continuous production can be executed. You may try to do it. Even in this case, it is desirable that the next big hit occurs early, so that the pending continuous production does not rather reduce the interest.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), when both the first jackpot and the latter jackpot type are 16R probability variation jackpots (that is, jackpots controlled in the second KT state), the jackpot game starts. When the jackpot is played (or during the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game), after notifying that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game this time, a pending sequence that notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed. May be notified. In this case, even if a small hit occurs based on the hold 1-3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification (and the effect related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect) is performed. Restrict it so that it will not be damaged. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the same situation as in the case of FIG. 107 (B) above, and rather deteriorating the interest due to the hold continuous production.

In addition, when executing the hold continuous production, the control that makes it appear that a series of big hit games is being executed is not performed, and the normal game is performed between the previous big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. You may.

FIG. 108 is a modification of the hold continuous effect control process in the example shown in FIGS. 107 (B) and 107 (C) in the case where a normal game is performed between the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows.

In the hold continuous effect control process shown in FIG. 108, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the set of the start prize designation command) includes a command indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled in the second KT state) (step S903510).

If the command indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is not included (N in step S903510), whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 is controlled to the second KT state after the current jackpot game according to the current jackpot type. (Step S903516). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "with second KT" and the character display of "without second KT". After that, if the hold continuous execution flag is set, it is reset (step S903515), and the process ends.

When the command indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is included (Y in step S903510), if the jackpot this time is the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 this time. After the big hit game of, the player is notified that the second KT state is not controlled (steps S903511, S903512). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "no second KT".

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot exists in the hold memory and the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903513). For example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous jackpot confirmation" is displayed to notify that the jackpot is continuously executed. After that, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903514), and ends the process.

By executing the processes of steps S903510, S903511, and S903513, the jackpots other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 6R probability variation jackpot that are not controlled by the second KT state) are controlled. Occasionally, if there is a hold memory that becomes a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, a big hit controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous effect can be executed. Further, when the processing of steps S903510, S903511, S903512, and S903513 is executed to control the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the second KT state) If there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot controlled by), the hold continuous effect can be executed after notifying that the jackpot controlled this time is a jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state. In the example of FIG. 108, the hold continuous effect is executed after notifying that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled in the second KT state. However, the hold continuous effect is not limited to such a configuration. (That is, after notifying that the jackpots are continuously executed), it may be notified that the jackpot controlled this time is a jackpot not controlled by the second KT state.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 109 to 112 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 109 shows a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 110 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 111 and 112 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 109 to 112, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 109, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 109 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90300 according to the jackpot pattern (see step S90979), and for example, the character 90301 is displayed. Then, a character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 90301. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, a case is shown in which the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90300 by the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 909, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S90500 to S90509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 109 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 110A, when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S90639 and S90644), and a small hit. When is generated, for example, a character display 304 such as "small hit has occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the prize ball number display 90303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90303 by the first KT pattern. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the effect display device 909 executes an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed, and executes a second prize ball increase effect (see steps S90510 to S90522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 110 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 111 (A), in the second KT state, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern (see step S90649), and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a character display 90306 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the prize ball number display 90305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 90305 is started (see step S90530). In the example shown in FIG. 111B, a predetermined effect image 90307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 90305 as an effect effect. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 9024, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S90526), and a prize effect is started (see step S90527). In the example shown in FIG. 111B, there is a case where a predetermined character 90308 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 90309 such as “+15” is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed is started in the effect display device 909, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (steps S90510, S90517, S90529). ~ S90539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 (C) to 112 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect is completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 112 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 112 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the prize ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S90526) and the prize is won, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting prize effect. The production is started (see step S90527).

Then, after that, the second prize ball increase effect is performed until all the prize ball number displays including the number of prize balls based on the prizes to the special prize opening 9024 generated additionally in FIG. 112 (E) are updated. Will be executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, as an effect effect, a case is shown in which an effect image 90307 in a form that glitters around the prize ball number display 90305 is displayed, but the case is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, as an effect effect, an effect of an aspect that acts on the prize ball number display 90305 may be executed in some form, such as displaying an image in a mode that covers the prize ball number display 90305. By acting on the prize ball number display 90305 in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the prize ball number display 90305 difficult to see.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls. Not limited to this, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. 109, and the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. 111 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the big hit game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the big hit game. It may be configured to add up and display the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state until the KT state is terminated and the non-KT state is entered. It may be configured. According to the aspect (2), the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state can be recognized, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 113 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 113, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 9024 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S90530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S90523). Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S90527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 113, in the small hit game in the second KT state, if the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the number of prize balls increased by the second prize is taken over, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 113, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 113. In addition, after the winning effect for the first prize is finished, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 9024 (special variable winning ball device 9022) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, the display of all prize balls is updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning productions are not finished, as shown in FIG. 113, after the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increase production and the winning production.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect. In addition, in FIG. 114, for example, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A) and (B-1). At the start timing of the variation display, which is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the variation display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right is started. In this case, the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the variable display is started (see step S90926).

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, when the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect is reached during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 114 (B-1), a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 909. Along with the appearance of the A90310, the continuous small hit effect A is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character A90310.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 114 (B-2). Along with the appearance of the character B90312, the continuous small hit effect B is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character B90312.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 114 (B-3). Along with the appearance of the character C90313, the continuous small hit effect C is executed in a manner of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character C90313.

Next, the production timing of the continuous small hit effect will be described. FIG. 115 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect. As shown in FIG. 115 (A), in this embodiment, even if a small hit occurs, if small hits are not continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays (before and after the fluctuation display that has become a small hit). The continuous small hit effect is configured to be infeasible (see steps S90929 and S90930), such as when the small hit is generated only once, such as when the fluctuation display of is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), when small hits are continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays, a continuous small hit effect is produced in the second and subsequent fluctuation displays in which small hits are continuously generated. It is feasible (see steps S90921a-S90928). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the second and subsequent variable displays in which small hits are continuously generated are started (step). (See S90926), when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed during the variable display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), a case is shown in which a continuous small hit effect can be executed during the fluctuation display in which a small hit occurs, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, the continuous small hit effect may be executed over the small hit game period after the end of the variation display in which the small hit occurs.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect is determined at the start of the variation display when the small hits occur continuously is shown, but the processing mode is not limited to such. .. For example, the effect control microphone computer 90200 determines at the timing when the small hit game is started when the small hit occurs (for example, after determining Y in step S90983 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 99). Based on the winning determination result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, and the fluctuation display to be started next is also small. If it is a hit, the same process as in steps S90922 to S90926 shown in this embodiment is executed to determine the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed over the period from the start of the small hit game to the next variable display.

Further, for example, the effect control microphone computer 90200 has a timing (for example, during the small hit game) when a small hit occurs and a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small hit game during the small hit game. At any timing in the middle of the small hit game, such as the timing when the start prize is generated during the small hit game), the next start is based on the look-ahead judgment result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display is also a small hit, and if the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, the same process as in step S90926 shown in this embodiment is followed. The presence / absence and type of continuous small hit effect may be determined. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect may be executed from the timing in the middle of the small hit game to the next variation display.

Further, in this embodiment, when the plate on which the game ball is paid out (the hitting ball supply plate 903 or the surplus ball receiving plate 904) becomes full, the full tank notification may be executed. For example, the amount of game balls stored in the hit ball supply plate 903 and the surplus ball receiver 904 can be detected by a detection means such as a sensor, and when the detection means detects that the stored amount is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, the effect is produced. The display device 909 displays the character "full tank error" or outputs an error sound to execute the full tank notification. Here, in this embodiment, the prize balls are paid out more frequently in the jackpot game state and the second KT state, but in the second KT state, the prize balls are not paid out as much as in the jackpot game state. The full tank condition is easily resolved. Therefore, the execution mode of the full tank notification may be different between the jackpot game state and the second KT state. For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a modest manner (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.) as compared with the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed. You may want to do it. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015) that can change between the first state in which the game medium can win and the second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. And the special variable winning ball device 9022), which is a state different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. And a special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state. Then, the variable winning means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, the flow of the game ball is delayed). It is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). Further, the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation). It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. Then, in the special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is higher than the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Low (for example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 74). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special state is controlled in the special state, the related effects related to the special state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effect, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, etc.) The related effect executing means that can execute the effect) and the hold related to the variable display that triggers the control of the advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pending continuous effect) suggesting that information is included, and when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the earlier advantageous state and the later Restriction means for restricting the execution of related effects when controlled to a special state with the advantageous state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effects, display of prize ball increase display during execution of hold continuous effects, The execution of productions related to small hits, such as prize-winning effects, is restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the suggestion effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state, it is a variable that triggers the control to the first advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means. Suggestion effects can be performed when pending information about the display is included (see, for example, FIG. 107 (B)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first advantageous state is controlled, the hold information stored by the hold storage means includes the hold information related to the variable display that triggers the control to the first advantageous state. In this case, the suggestion effect can be executed after notifying that the advantageous state controlled this time is the second advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 107 (C)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification means (for example, the effect display) capable of executing the promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route when controlled in the special state. The device 909 is provided with a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, etc.), and the promotion notification means is when the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. , The promotion notification may be executed in a different manner from the time when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time in the KT state (that is,). , 2nd variation pattern # 26, # 28) than when the variation display is executed by the shortened variation variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). , The character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, a storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, a hitting ball supply plate 903 or a surplus ball receiving plate 904) and a full tank notification indicating that the storage means is in a full tank state can be executed. The tongue notification means (for example, realized by displaying the character "full tank error" in the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound) is provided, and the tongue notification means is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be possible to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when the player is in the state and when the game is controlled in the special state (for example, in the second KT state, it is more modest than in the jackpot game state. The full tank notification may be executed depending on the mode (for example, the character size of "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.), or when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount in the big hit game state. , The full tank notification may be executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification may be executed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result (in this example, the jackpot symbol), the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game) has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the special state. It is possible to control to a special state), and when the display result of the variable display becomes a special result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Further, in the special state, the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, since the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is frequently executed, and the second 2 It may be a small hit only when the variable display of the special symbol is executed). Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, "high degree of advantage" means, for example, when the player is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) or a special state (in this example, a small hit game state). It means that the degree of expectation for acquiring a game medium per game is high. For example, a variable winning ball device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022) may be opened for a long time or may be opened many times, so that many prizes may be obtained or one prize may be obtained. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a lot of game value, such as getting a lot of balls.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to control a special state that is advantageous to the player (in this example, a small hit game state), and based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (in this example, a big hit). Therefore, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, the KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased as compared with before the special condition is satisfied. Further, in the special state, when the next variable display after being controlled to the special state is executed and the special state is controlled again, the special effect (in this example, the continuous small hit effect) is executed. It is possible. Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the counting display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) is updated and displayed based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024). It is possible, and the first display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern) and the second display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern) that is highlighted more than the first display mode. ), The count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, in the big hit pattern during the big hit game state, the prize ball number display 90300 is updated and displayed at the lower left end of the effect display device 909. As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the prize ball number display 90305 is enlarged and displayed and the effect image 90307 is displayed and updated near the center of the effect display device 909). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of display modes for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is displayed as the counting display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when some gauge display or countdown display is performed in the effect as the count display, the configuration shown in this embodiment may be applied. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 is shown as a predetermined opportunity, but it is not limited to such a mode, for example, some gauge display level. It may be the one that the condition of up is satisfied. Further, for example, in the case of applying to a slot machine, it may be assumed that a predetermined opportunity occurs based on the occurrence of a small winning combination or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display is additionally displayed as an update display, but not limited to such an embodiment, when some count display is subtracted and displayed, this implementation is performed. It may be configured to apply the configuration shown in the form.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90200 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90200 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. before reaching the reach (so-called when the reach is not reached). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to relationships such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0%).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. The variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is another substrate (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, etc. shown in 63, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 by executing the control related to the voice control and the lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 9070 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, an example is obtained in which a game medium is used as a game machine, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine in which a game medium such as a ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination of probabilistic jackpots as jackpot types, a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a game machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in a special variable winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine that is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Acting gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Design hold storage display unit 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU
80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control CPU
320 Right-handed instruction image 321 Left-handed instruction image 560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 908a First special symbol display 908b Second special symbol display 909 Effect display device 909a First variable display unit 909b Second variable display unit 909c Background symbol display 9013 1st start winning opening 9013a 1st starting opening switch 9014 2nd starting winning opening 9014a 2nd starting opening switch 9015 Variable winning ball device 9017 Acting gate 9017a Acting gate switch 9018c Symbol holding storage display 9020 Special variable Winning ball device 9022 Special variable winning ball device 9023 Bottom member 9024 Special winning opening 9023a 1st count switch 9025a 2nd count switch 9031 Main board 9032 Gate 9056 CPU
9080 Production control board 90200 Production control microcomputer 90201 Production control CPU
90560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state by performing variable display.
A first general mouth, which is a general mouth to which a predetermined number of game media are given based on the entry of the game medium, and a second general mouth provided on a route different from the first general mouth.
In the advantageous state, a promotion effect for urging the game medium to be launched toward the path provided with the first general mouth and a specific notification effect for notifying that the game medium has entered can be executed. Control means and
With
The effect control means executes the specific notification effect when an approach occurs at the first general mouth in the advantageous state, but enters at the second general port when the advantageous state is reached. When the above-mentioned specific notification effect is not executed,
further,
A variable means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult.
A special state control means that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state including the change of the variable means to the first state.
A special state control means capable of controlling a special state, which is more frequently controlled to the special state than a normal state,
A granting effect executing means capable of executing a granting effect when a game value is given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area provided in the variable means in accordance with the control of the special state. ,
The variable means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable means cannot enter after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the percentage,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the game medium entering the predetermined area with the control of the special state, the giving effect is not executed.
A game machine characterized by that.